Xerox Workcentre 7435 User Manual

WorkCentre® 7400 Series  
Multifunction Printer  
®
WorkCentre  
7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
English  
Français  
Español  
Guide de l’administrateur système  
Guía del administrador del sistema  
Português Guia de Administração do Sistema  
Contents  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
3
4
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
5
6
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
7
8
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
General Information  
1
This chapter includes:  
9
 
General Information  
Resources  
You can get information about your printer from the following sources.  
Information  
Source  
Installation Guide  
Quick Use Guide  
Packaged with printer  
Packaged with printer  
User Guide (PDF)  
User Documentation  
Customer Documentation CD  
Information about menu selection or error  
messages on control panel  
Control panel Help (?) button  
Control panel menu  
Information pages  
Print Drivers  
Recommended Material List – North America  
Recommended Material List – Europe  
Online Support Assistant  
Technical Support  
Registration  
Supplies  
10  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Installation  
2
This chapter includes:  
11  
 
Installation  
Installation  
Overview  
1. Connect one end of a Category 5 twisted pair cable to a live network drop. Connect the other end  
of the cable to the RJ–45 socket at the rear of the printer.  
2. Set the printer's power switch to On and wait until the main screen is displayed.  
3. Print a Configuration Report. Refer to the Configuration Report to determine which ports and  
protocols are enabled for your network. For more information see Configuration Report on page 22.  
4. Enable the printer’s internet services (HTTP) and TCP/IP protocol so that you can configure the  
printer using the CentreWare Internet Services Web interface. For more information see  
5. Install the print drivers and set up computers to communicate with the printer.  
6. If you have purchased optional features for your printer, such as Scanning to the printer's Hard  
Drive, configure these options. For more information see Scanning and Faxing on page 97.  
Changing the Default Main Screen  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Touch Common Service Settings, touch Screen/Button Settings, select Service Screen Default,  
touch Change Settings, make your selection and touch Save.  
6. Touch Close until the Tools tab is displayed.  
7. Wait for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
12  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Print Driver Installation  
Print Driver Installation  
Supported Operating Systems  
Windows 2000 Professional, 2000 Server, 2003 Server, XP Professional, Vista  
Macintosh OSX 10.3 and newer  
UNIX  
Obtaining Drivers  
Drivers are on a CD that came with your printer. If you do not have the CD, you can download drivers at  
TCP/IP Peer to Peer (LPR or Standard TCP/IP) Printing  
Windows Print Driver Installation  
1. On the Windows XP desktop, click Start, then Printers and Faxes. The Vista path is Start\Control  
Panel\Printer(s).  
2. Double-click Add Printer.  
3. When the Add Printer Wizard screen displays, click Next.  
4. Select Local Printer and deselect Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer.  
Click Next.  
5. Select Create a new port and choose LPR from the Type drop down menu. (LPR becomes available  
when Print Services for UNIX is installed, as above).  
Note: If you prefer to print raw data to Port 9100 on the printer, choose Standard TCP/IP Port. Click  
Next.  
6. When prompted, enter the IP address of the printer.  
7. Enter a name for the print queue (such as raw). If you selected the Standard TCP/IP port, you can  
accept the default name provided by Windows. Click Next.  
8. You will be prompted for a print driver. Select Have Disk and browse to the location of your print  
driver.  
9. Select the .INF file, then click Open.  
10. When the Install from Disk screen displays, verify that the path and file name are correct and click  
OK.  
11. Select the model that corresponds to your printer and click Next.  
12. Enter a name for your printer and select either Yes or No to make this printer your default printer.  
Select Yes if you will be printing primarily to this printer from your applications. Click Next.  
13. Select Yes to print a test page. Click Next.  
14. Click Finish.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
13  
           
Installation  
Configure the Print Driver  
1. Click Start, select Printers and Faxes. The Vista path is Start\Control Panel\Printer(s).  
2. Right click the printer's icon and select Properties.  
3. Use the available tabs to set the printer's job processing defaults, including enabling Bi-Directional  
Communication. Additional settings may be accessed by clicking the Printing Preferences button  
on the General Tab.  
NetBIOS over IP Peer to Peer Printing  
Before You Start  
1. Obtain the print driver for your computer's operating system. See Obtaining Drivers on page 13.  
2. Print a Configuration Report. See Configuration Report on page 22.  
3. On the Configuration Report, verify that SMB and TCP/IP are enabled. Verify that the workgroup's  
default name is Workgroup, or a valid, 15 character maximum, workgroup name. Also note the  
printer's SMB Host Name (which assures the uniqueness of the printer's name within the  
Workgroup). To enable SMB, see Microsoft (NetBIOS over IP) Networks on page 52. Modify the  
name of the Workgroup, or printer's name (SMB Host name) using CentreWare Internet Services.  
4. Make sure to configure the DNS/WINS Server(s) for NetBIOS name to IP address resolution. Then  
provide the printer with the addresses of the Servers. For more information, see TCP/IP Protocol  
An Alternate Procedure for Setting up NetBIOS over IP Peer to Peer Printing  
Note: Experienced System Administrators can use the following procedure:  
1. On Windows XP computers, from the Properties selection of the Local Area Connection icon,  
verify that the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is installed. Select the protocol and click Properties. Verify  
that TCP/IP is configured for use of the DNS Server. Click the Advanced button and select the DNS  
tab. Verify that the check box labeled Register this connection's addresses in DNS is checked. Select  
the WINS Tab and verify that the NetBIOS setting is set to either Use NetBIOS Setting from the  
DHCP Server, or that NetBIOS is enabled over TCP/IP. Click Cancel twice and verify that the Client  
for Microsoft Networks is installed. Finally, with your Operating System Installer Disk readily  
available, through Add/Remove Programs and Add/Remove Windows Components, select Other  
Network File and Print Services. Click Details, check the box for Print Services for UNIX, and click  
OK and Next.  
2. When prompted for the Name or address of the server providing LPD enter the printer's SMB Host  
Name as seen on the printer's Configuration Report.  
3. When prompted for a queue name, enter your preference of an easily-identified name for this  
printer.  
4. Install the print driver on your computer and, when prompted to select a port to print through,  
select the LPR port that you just created.  
5. Print a Test Print to verify successful communication with the printer.  
14  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Print Driver Installation  
NetBIOS over IP Client/Server Printing  
Before You Start  
1. Obtain the print driver for your computer's operating system. See Obtaining Drivers on page 13.  
2. Print a Configuration Report. See Configuration Report on page 22.  
3. On the Configuration Report, verify that SMB is enabled. Also, verify that TCP/IP is enabled as one  
of the supported protocols. To enable SMB, see Microsoft (NetBIOS over IP) Networks on page 52).  
4. Set Up a Server to Queue Jobs to the Printer. If you have not already set up a Server, for a quick-  
step set up procedure, for help see Microsoft (NetBIOS over IP) Networks on page 52.  
Windows Print Driver Installation  
Verify that the Correct Protocols and Services are Installed in the Computer  
1. Verify that the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) is installed in the Computer. On the Windows XP desktop,  
click Start, Control Panel, and double click Network Connections. Right click the Local Area  
Connection icon and select Properties.  
On the Windows 2000 Desktop, right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties. Right  
click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.  
2. Verify that the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) has been loaded. If it has, click this item and click the  
Properties button to verify that this computer is using either a dynamic or static method to obtain  
a valid TCP/IP address.  
3. Also verify that this computer is using a DNS (or WINS) Server for resolution of the NetBIOS Host  
name (typically the same name as the computer's Internet host name). If the TCP/IP protocol is  
not loaded, click the Install… button, then select Protocol as the type of network component that  
you wish to install. Click the Add… button and select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).  
4. With your operating system installer disk readily available, click the Have Disk… button and follow  
any remaining instructions.  
5. Verify that the Client for Microsoft Networks is installed in the computer. On the Windows XP  
desktop, click Start, Control Panel, and double click Network Connections. Right click the Local  
Area Connection icon and select Properties.  
On the Windows 2000 Desktop, right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties. Right  
click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.  
6. If the Client for Microsoft Networks is not loaded, click the Install… button, then select Client as  
the type of network component that you wish to install.  
7. Click the Add… button and select Client for Microsoft Networks.  
8. With your operating system installer disk readily available, click the Have Disk… button and follow  
any remaining instructions.  
Add the Printer to the Windows Desktop  
1. On the desktop, from Start, select Printers and Faxes.  
2. Double-click Add Printer. From Printer Tasks, select Add a printer.  
3. When the Add Printer Wizard displays, click Next.  
4. Select Network Printer and click Next.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
15  
 
Installation  
5. In Windows XP, on the Specify a Printer screen, select Connect to this printer (or to browse for a  
printer, select this option and click Next). As a shortcut, if you know the UNC (Universal Naming  
Convention) of the printer, enter it in the text box. Click Next.  
In Windows 2000, on the Locate Your Printer screen, select Type the printer name or click next to  
browse for a printer. Click Next.  
6. When the Browse for Printer screen displays, wait for the screen to finish loading its list of Shared  
Printers. The displayed format for many of these Shared Printers is the UNC of the Printer (for  
example, \\computer (i.e. Server) name\share (i.e. Printer) name).  
7. On the Browse for Printer screen, either click one of the displayed Servers or UNCs, or enter the UNC  
of your server and its shared printer. Click Next.  
8. When prompted for the driver files, select Have Disk and browse to the location of your print driver.  
9. Select the .INF file then click Open.  
10. When the Install from Disk screen displays, verify the path and file name are correct and click OK.  
11. Select the model that corresponds to your Printer and click Next.  
12. Enter a name for your Printer and select either Yes or No for making this printer your default  
Windows printer. Select Yes if you will be printing primarily to this printer from your Windows  
applications. Click Next.  
13. Select Yes to print a test page. Click Next.  
14. Click Finish.  
Configure the Print Driver  
1. On the desktop, from Start, select Printers and Faxes.  
2. Right click the printer's icon and select Properties.  
3. Use the available tabs to set the printer's job processing defaults, including enabling Bi-Directional  
Communication. Additional settings may be accessed by clicking the Printing Preferences button  
on the General Tab.  
IPP Printing – Windows  
IPP (the Internet Printing Protocol) enables the convenience of printing over the Internet or Intranet  
through the creation of an IPP network port. This printing service is available for other computer  
operating systems through downloads from the Microsoft Web site. Follow the instructions provided by  
Microsoft to install the IPP service on operating systems other than Windows 2000 and XP.  
Before You Start  
1. Obtain the print driver for your computer's operating system. See Obtaining Drivers on page 13.  
2. Print a Configuration Report. See Configuration Report on page 22.  
3. On the Report, under the TCP/IP data label, verify that the printer has a valid IP Address, Subnet  
Mask, and Gateway displayed. If it does not, assign these addresses to the printer. For more  
4. On the Report, verify that Port 9100 is displayed with a Port Status of Enabled. If it is not, enable  
Port 9100. Click the Port Status in the Connectivity folder on the Properties tab of  
CentreWare Internet Services and make sure that the Port 9100 check box is selected.  
16  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Print Driver Installation  
5. On the report, verify that IPP is enabled. If it is not, enable it. See IPP Configuration on page 54.  
6. Verify that IPP is using DNS to resolve Host Names to IP Addresses in support of IPP printing. Enter  
your printer’s IP address into your Web browser’s address field to access  
CentreWare Internet Services. Click the Properties tab. Click the Connectivity folder, then on the  
Protocols folder and select IPP. Verify that the DNS Enablement check box is selected.  
Verify that TCP/IP is Installed in the Computer  
1. On the Windows 2000 Desktop, right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties. Right  
click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.  
On the Windows XP desktop, click Start, Control Panel, and double click Network Connections.  
2. Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.  
3. Verify that the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) has been loaded. If it has, click this item and click the  
Properties button to verify that this computer is using either a dynamic or static method to obtain  
a valid TCP/IP address.  
4. If the TCP/IP protocol is not loaded, click the Install… button, then select Protocol as the type of  
network component that you wish to install. Click the Add… button and select Internet Protocol  
(TCP/IP).  
5. With your Operating System Installer Disk readily available, click Have Disk… and follow any  
remaining instructions.  
6. Once the protocol has been installed, you can click the item and click the Properties button to verify  
or set up the method being used for TCP/IP addressing.  
Add the Printer to the Windows Desktop  
1. On the desktop, from the Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. The Vista path is Start\Control  
Panel\Printer(s).  
2. On Windows XP, from Printer Tasks, select Add a printer.  
3. When the Add Printer Wizard displays, click Next.  
4. Select Network Printer and click Next.  
5. To create an IPP printer select Connect to a printer on the Internet….  
6. Type http:// followed by the printer's fully qualified Domain name or IP address in the URL field.  
You may have to type /ipp after the printer's name or ip address. the printer's name can be either  
the Internet Host Name or the SMB Host Name as shown on the printer's Configuration Report,  
depending on the name resolution used by your network (DNS or WINS).  
7. Click Next.  
8. When prompted for the driver files, select Have Disk and browse to the location of your print driver.  
9. Select the .INF file then click Open.  
10. When the Install from Disk screen displays, verify the path and file name are correct and click OK.  
11. Select the model that corresponds to your printer and click Next.  
12. Enter a name for your printer and select either Yes or No for making this printer your default  
Windows printer. Select Yes if you will be printing primarily to this printer from your Windows  
applications. Click Next.  
13. Select Yes to print a test page. Click Next.  
14. Click Finish.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
17  
Installation  
Configure the Print Driver  
1. On the Windows XP desktop, from Start, select Printers and Faxes. The Vista path is Start\Control  
Panel\Printer(s).  
2. Right click the printer's icon and select Properties. Use the available tabs to set the printer's job  
processing defaults, including enabling Bi-Directional Communication. Additional settings may be  
accessed by clicking the Printing Preferences button on the General tab.  
EtherTalk (AppleTalk) Peer to Peer Printing  
Before You Start  
1. Obtain the print driver for your computer's operating system. See Obtaining Drivers on page 13.  
2. Print a Configuration Report. See Configuration Report on page 22.  
3. On the Configuration Report, under the EtherTalk data label, verify that the EtherTalk port is  
enabled, and that the printer has been assigned an EtherTalk (Printer) Name and an EtherTalk  
zone. If one or more of these parameters needs to be configured, see EtherTalk (AppleTalk)  
Installation Instructions for Macintosh OS X 10.3 and Newer  
1. Double click to open the folder containing the drivers.  
2. Double click to open the machine model.dmg.  
3. Double click to open the machine model.pkg file.  
4. When the Welcome screen displays, click Continue.  
5. Click Continue, then Agree or Accept to accept the License Agreement.  
6. Select the required disk (if necessary) where you want to install the printer. Click Continue.  
7. Click Install.  
8. Click Close, and restart the computer.  
9. When the computer has restarted, double click the hard drive icon.  
10. Double click the Applications icon.  
11. Double click the Utilities folder.  
12. Double click Print Center icon.  
13. Double click Add to add a new printer.  
14. Select AppleTalk as your network protocol.  
15. Select the required AppleTalk zone.  
16. Select the printer that you wish to set up.  
17. Select the Printer Model (that is, choose the PPD for your printer).  
18. Click Add.  
19. Print a document from an application to verify that the printer is installed correctly.  
18  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Print Driver Installation  
Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)  
Overview  
The Common UNIXS Printing System (CUPS) was created by Easy Software Products in 1998 as a  
modern replacement for the Berkeley Line Printer Daemon (LPD) and AT&T Line Printer (LP) system  
designed in the 1970's for printing text to line printers.  
Currently available for downloading from a number of sources on the Internet, such as www.cups.org,  
CUPS is offered in both source code and binary distributions.  
Before You Start  
Verify that IPP and Port 9100 are enabled at your printer. For more information see IPP Configuration  
Installing CUPS on the UNIX computer  
The instructions for installing and building CUPS are contained in the CUPS Software Administrators  
Manual, written and copyrighted by Easy Software Products and available for downloading at  
www.cups.org/documentation.php. An Overview of the Common UNIX Printing System, Version 1.1 by  
Easy Software is also available at this site.  
A case history of the building and installation of CUPS source code on a FreeBSD 4.2 machine, is  
described in the article entitled Using CUPS – the Common UNIX Printing System, by Ralph Krause,  
available at www.cups.org, through thes/documentation/tutorials/BSD Today – Using CUPS selections.  
Directory locations for the CUPS files, as described in this article, are the following:  
Programs were copied to /usr/local/bin and usr/local/sbin.  
Documentation was copied to /usr/local/share/docs/cups.  
A directory called /usr/local/share/cups was created for various CUPS data files.  
The configuration files were copied to /usr/local/etc/cups.  
The binary distribution of CUPS is available in tar format with installation and removal scripts, as well  
as in rpm and dpkg formats for RedHat and Debian versions of Linux. After logging into the computer  
as root (su) and downloading the appropriate files to the root directory, the CUPS installation process  
begins as follows:  
Tar format:  
After untarring the files, run the installation script with ./cups.install (and press Enter).  
RPM format:  
rpm -e lpr  
rpm -i cups-1.1-linux-M.m.n-intel.rpm (and press Enter).  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
19  
 
Installation  
Debian format:  
dpkg -i cups-1.1-linux-M.m.n-intel.deb (and press Enter).  
Note: RedHat Linux, versions 7.3 and newer, include CUPS support, so software downloading is  
unnecessary. Also, CUPS is the default printing system used by Mandrake Linux.  
Installing the Xerox PPD on the Computer  
The Xerox PPD for CUPS should be available on one of the CDs that came with your printer. If you no  
longer have the CDs, download the PPD from:  
From the CD or from the downloaded Internet file, with root privileges copy the PPD into your cups ppd  
folder on your computer. If you are unsure of the folder's location, use the Find command to locate the  
ppd's. An example of the location of the ppd.gz files in RedHat 8.1 is /usr/share/cups/model.  
Adding the Xerox Printer  
1. Use the PS command to make sure that the CUPS daemon is running. The daemon can be  
restarted from Linux using the init.d script that was created when the CUPS RPM was installed. The  
command is > /etc/init.d/cups restart. A similar script or directory entry should have been created in  
System V and BSD. For the example of CUPS built and installed on a FreeBSD 4.2 machine from the  
source code, run cupsd from /usr/local/sbin. (cd /usr/local/sbin cupsd press Enter).  
2. Type http://localhost:631/admin into the address (URL) box of your Web browser and press Enter.  
3. For User ID, type root. For the requested password, type the root password.  
4. Click Add Printer and follow the on screen prompts to add the printer to the CUPS printer list.  
Printing with CUPS  
CUPS supports the use of both the System V (lp) and Berkeley (lpr) printing commands.  
Use the -d option with the lp command to print to a specific printer.  
lp -dprinter filename (and press Enter)  
Use the -P option with the lpr command to print to a specific printer.  
lpr -Pprinter filename (and press Enter)  
For complete information on CUPS printing capabilities, see the CUPS Software Users Manual available  
Installing Unicode Fonts  
The Xerox Unicode 3.0 font kit for SAP is available for this printer. Install the Unicode fonts to print  
documents in multiple languages, in an SAP environment. To order the kit, contact your Xerox  
representative.  
20  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Administrative Tools  
3
This chapter includes:  
21  
 
Administrative Tools  
Configuration Report  
To print a Configuration Report:  
1. Press the Machine Status button on the control panel.  
2. Press the Print Reports button.  
3. Press the Copy Reports button.  
4. Press the Configuration Report button.  
5. Press the green Start button, to the right of the control panel’s numeric keypad.  
6. The printing process will be displayed on the touch screen.  
The Configuration Report is formatted into two columns with horizontal ruled lines indicating four  
distinct data display areas on the print.  
The first area displays System Settings.  
The second area displays Copy Service Settings.  
The third area displays Print Service Settings.  
The fourth area displays Communication Settings.  
22  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
CentreWare Internet Services  
CentreWare Internet Services  
CentreWare Internet Services is the Web interface to the HTTP server in the printer. It allows you to  
configure the printer remotely from a Web browser on a network computer.  
Note: You must set your Web browser so that it will not use a proxy server to access  
CentreWare Internet Services.  
System Administrator Login ID and Passcode  
If authentication is enabled, you must enter the system administrator login ID and passcode to access  
all printer settings. These credentials are required when accessing printer settings at the control panel.  
and through CentreWare Internet Services. You are required to enter system administrator credentials  
when accessing settings in the Properties tab in CentreWare Internet Services.  
The default settings are:  
Administrator Login ID: admin  
Passcode: 1111  
For more information see Authentication on page 62.  
Changing Internet Services (HTTP) Settings  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Press the Tools tab.  
5. Press Connectivity & Network Setup.  
6. Press Port Settings.  
7. When the Port Settings menu displays, press the down arrow key to view additional selections.  
8. Press the Internet Services (HTTP) selection line.  
9. Press the Change Settings button in the lower right corner of the Port Settings menu screen.  
10. When the Internet Services (HTTP) menu displays, you have two settings available for selection.  
The Port Settings menu selections are Port Status and Internet Services Port Number. After  
pressing the selection line, to access available settings press the Change Settings button in the  
lower right corner of the touch screen.  
Enabling Internet Services (HTTP)  
1. Press Port Status in the Internet Services (HTTP) menu.  
2. Press the Change Settings button.  
3. Press Enabled.  
4. Press Save.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
23  
         
Administrative Tools  
5. To exit the screen, without making any changes, press the Cancel button.  
Internet Services Port Number  
1. Press Internet Services Port Number in the Internet Services (HTTP) menu.  
2. Press Change Settings.  
3. On the Port Number screen, use the keypad to enter the port number (default of 80).  
4. Press Save.  
5. Press Cancel to exit without making changes.  
6. To exit the Internet Services Selection Menu touch Close in the upper right corner of the touch  
screen.  
7. To exit the Port Settings menu, returning to the printer's Tools screen, touch Close again.  
Proxy Server Settings  
To use the Web Service button on the printer (if available), which enables the printer to access HTTP  
file servers on the Internet, you need to enter your Proxy Server information as described here.  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
5. Select Proxy Server Settings folder.  
6. Place a check mark in the Use Proxy Server check box.  
7. From the Proxy Setup drop down menu, select either Same Proxy for All Protocols, or Different  
Proxy for each Protocol, depending upon your Proxy Server setup.  
8. In the Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server box, enter up to 1024 characters of IP addresses, fully  
qualified host names, or wildcard host names (such as *.eng), separated by semicolons. Functioning  
like the local address exception list in a typical Web browser, these addresses will be permitted to  
bypass the Proxy Server.  
9. For the HTTP or HTTPS Server Names, provide a name of up to 255 characters in length for one or  
both of these Proxy Servers. A fully qualified domain name or IP address can be used.  
Note: Make sure that DNS is enabled See TCP/IP Protocol Configuration on page 43.  
10. Leave the Port Number set to 8080 (the IANA recognized proxy port) unless you are using a  
different port number. If you are using a different port number, enter it in the available box.  
11. Check the Authentication box if client authentication is required for the Proxy Server.  
12. Enter the Login Name for access to the proxy server. Up to 32 characters can be entered.  
13. Enter the Password for access to the proxy server. Up to 32 characters can be entered.  
14. Click Apply.  
15. Enter the System Administrator user ID and password when prompted and click OK.  
24  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
CentreWare Internet Services  
Overview  
CentreWare Internet Services contains the following main menu tabs:  
Status: View the status of the printer's trays and consumables.  
Jobs: View the current job queue, as well as a history of processed jobs.  
Print: Change Job Submission settings.  
Scan: Create and edit Distribution Templates.  
Properties: Allows you to configure the printer for job processing, options support, and network  
communications.  
Note: If authentication is enabled, you must enter the system administrator User Name and Password  
(default admin, 1111) if prompted, to access the Properties tab.  
Support: View system administrator and Xerox contact information.  
Status Tab  
The Status tab allows you to see the status of the printer’s trays and consumables.  
General for a general description of the printer. Click Reboot Machine to restart the printer.  
Trays: View the status of the desired item.  
Consumables: View the status of the desired item.  
Press Refresh a refresh a status page.  
Jobs Tab  
The Jobs tab allows you to view the current job queue, as well as a history of processed jobs.  
Active Jobs: View the current job queue.  
Job History List Folder: View a list of jobs that have been printed, copied, and scanned.  
Error History: View a list of Errors and the time and date when they occurred.  
Print Tab  
The Print tab allows you to edit job submission settings. Delivery methods include Immediate Print,  
Sample Set, Delayed Print, and Secure Print. Click Browse… to locate your print-ready job. Click Submit  
Job when you are ready to submit your job. For information, see Secure Print on page 87.  
Note: Print-ready jobs must be in a file format that the printer recognizes (PostScript files with a .ps file  
extension, for example).  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
25  
       
Administrative Tools  
Scan Tab  
Includes Job Templates, Folder, and Job Flow Sheets.  
Folder: Lets you create individual folders into which you can direct scanned documents. These  
documents can then be retrieved and printed, either at the printer or locally at your computer, as  
explained in the Scanning to the printer’s Hard Drive (Folder) topic. For more information see  
Job Templates: Customize and use Job Templates to scan and transfer documents directly to  
Network Servers. For more information see Network Scanning (Using Templates) on page 112.  
Job Flow Sheets: Change the sheet type, and order and assign a user name. For more information  
Properties Tab  
The Properties tab allows you to configure the printer's job processing options and network  
communications settings.  
Note: If authentication is enabled, you must enter the system administrator User Name and Password  
(default admin, 1111) if prompted to access the Properties tab. You may also be prompted for the user  
name and password when changing settings in the Properties tab.  
Configuration Overview: Provides shortcuts to commonly used configuration pages within the  
Properties tab. Click Settings, then Configure, to go directly to the page without having to  
navigate through the folders in the directory tree on the left.  
Description: Allows you to see and edit basic identification information about your printer.  
General Setup Folder  
The General Setup folder contains the following pages and folders:  
Configuration: Lists current printer settings such as memory allocation; available page description  
languages and their version numbers; firmware (software) versions for the controller and printer  
components; hard disk partition information; and hardware information (indicating the availability  
of the Ethernet Port and Hard Disk, for example).  
Job Management: Allows you to set permissions that allow system administrators or general (non-  
administrator) users to delete jobs from the printer’s print queue.  
Paper Tray Attributes: Provides a display of the available trays (including bypass), their media  
settings, and tray selection order.  
Paper Settings: Displays paper settings, which can be manipulated and set for installed trays. See  
the printer's User Guide for more information.  
Power Saver Settings: Displays the settings for low power mode and sleep mode. Low Power Mode  
is selectable from 1 to 240 minutes. Sleep Mode is selectable from 1 to 240 minutes.  
Stored Job Settings: Set a minimum passcode length for jobs stored on the printer.  
Memory Settings: View or change the amount of memory allocated on the hard drive for spooling  
incoming jobs into buffers (dedicated to specific ports or protocols).  
Internet Services Settings: View or change the Auto Refresh Interval, or the Display Language (if  
available).  
26  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
CentreWare Internet Services  
Pool Server Settings: Set up the login details from this device to a remote template pool server.  
Cloning: Copy the settings and Web-generated scan templates of one printer and transfer them to  
other printers operating with the same version of system software. Groups of settings can be  
cloned, depending on the optional features installed on the printer.  
Alert Notification Folder  
Billing Meter Read Alerts: Set up an e-mail notification to the designated Billing Administrator  
whenever billing meters are automatically read by the Meter Assistant.  
Supplies Data Sent Alerts: Set the receiving E-mail address for alerts from the Supplies  
Assistant.  
Billing & Counters Folder: View the total number of pages, images, or jobs processed by the  
printer.  
Smart eSolutions Folder: Set up automatic billing meter reading and supplies reporting. For more  
Connectivity Folder  
Port Settings: Enable or disable ports. Note that if any selections, such as Port 9100 for example,  
are unavailable for setting using the printer's control panel, they can be set here. You can enable or  
disable the following ports:  
EtherTalk  
NetWare (for Novell networks)  
SNMP  
SMB  
LPD  
Port 9100  
Send E-mail  
Receive E-mail  
E-mail Notification Service  
Internet Services  
FTP Client  
IPP  
UPnP Discovery  
WebDAV  
Bonjour  
WSD  
SOAP  
Physical Connections Folder  
Ethernet: View or change Ethernet (speed) Settings from a drop down selection list. Selections  
include: Auto (auto sensing), (10/100Base-TX), 100Base-TX (Half or Full Duplex), and 10Base-  
TX (Half or Full Duplex). The MAC Address of the printer is also displayed, but not editable.  
Parallel: View or change the enablement settings for Bi-Directional Communications (a check  
box) and Auto Eject Time (Parallel Port Timeout), with a range of 5 to 1275 seconds.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
27  
Administrative Tools  
USB: View or change the Auto Eject Time, which is the length of time the Controller will wait for  
an end of job command before processing the job.  
Note: Parallel and USB are options that must installed before they will be displayed.  
Protocols Folder: View or modify the communication protocols used by the printer. SMTP Server,  
and POP3 Setup allow you to configure E-mail server addresses, for E-mail scanning. Set your proxy  
server parameters for Meter Assistant and Web Service (if available)on the Proxy Server page.  
LDAP Folder: The LDAP folder contains the same settings available under Authentication  
Configuration in the Security folder. This allows you to configure authentication for the printer  
using LDAP, or to independently configure LDAP for use with the printer, such as in address  
book for E-mail.  
Services Folder  
Print Mode: Set the page description language emulation used by the printer's input ports  
displayed on the screen. Depending upon the Ports enabled at the printer, the list of ports will  
include: Parallel, AppleTalk (with PostScript), SMB, LPD, IPP and Port 9100. Typical page description  
selections for each port include: Auto (auto select), PostScript, HP-GL/2, PCL, and TIFF/JPEG.  
Language Emulations Folder: View and change the printer's default preferences for processing  
Page Description Languages.  
E-mail Folder: View and change the printer's default E-mail message settings, and import a public  
address book from a .CSV file, for use with E-mail, Fax, and Internet Fax. Click the Browse… button  
to locate your CSV formatted file, then click Import Now.  
Internet Fax: View and change the printer's default Internet Fax message settings, and import a  
public address book from a .CSV file, for use with E-mail, Fax, and Internet Fax. Click the Browse…  
button to locate your CSV formatted file, then click Import Now.  
Fax Folder: View and change the printer's default Fax and Server Fax setttings, and import a public  
address book from a .CSV file, for use with E-mail, Fax, and Internet Fax. Click the Browse… button  
to locate your CSV formatted file, then click Import Now. Enable or disable Confirmation printing  
(Server Fax).  
Network Scanning Folder: Set up Network Scanning using Templates.  
Machine Software Folder:  
Upgrades: Enable the printer for software upgrades.  
Manual Upgrade: Upgrade the printer software.  
Xerox Services Folder: Set up the Xerox Communication Server. This is the Xerox server that  
supports automatic billing and supplies reporting. For more information see Xerox Smart eSolutions  
Custom Services Folder  
Validation Options: Works with a validation server, which is used in an enterprise network to  
certify the authenticity of Digital Certificates used for file encryption. Note that Digital  
Certificates typically work with SSL/TLS encryption, which is set up from the Machine Digital  
Certificate Management in the Security folder. The host name and path settings for a  
validation server are set up through the Validation Server in the Network Scanning subfolder.  
Custom Services: Enable Custom Services and Password Transmission.  
28  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
CentreWare Internet Services  
Accounting Folder  
Configure Accounting server and login options.  
Security Folder  
Authentication Configuration: Set up the printer with local and remote Authentication. User  
Details Setup is used to configure the characteristics of the login prompt for User  
Authentication.  
Remote Authentication Server: Configure authentication administered by a remote server.  
IP Filtering: Set up IP address restrictions for access to this device.  
Audit Log: Enable or disable the Audit Log.  
Machine Digital Certificate Management: Manage digital certificates stored on the printer.  
IP Sec: Configure IP Sec encryption.  
Certificates Management: Sets the categories for trusted certificate management (used with  
digital certificates).  
802.1x : Enable and configure 802.1x settings.  
SSL / TLS: Configure the settings for SSL / TLS encryption.  
PDF / XPS Security Settings: Add a digital signature to PDF and XPS files.  
System Administrator Settings: Change the Login ID and Passcode used by the System  
Administrator to access Tools on the printer’s control panel, and to modify Properties in  
CentreWare Internet Services.  
Details of Some Properties Tab Features  
Setting TIFF (and other PDL) Processing Properties  
To set the Printer's default TIFF / JPEG, PostScript, PCL, or HP-GL/2 processing properties, perform the  
following steps:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Services folder.  
5. Click the Printing folder, then the Language Emulations folder.  
6. Click TIFF / JPEG, or PostScript, or PCL, or HP-GL/2 to access the printer's list of default settings for  
processing the selected Page Description Language.  
7. Select a Printer number and click Edit (when available) to access a list of numerous processing  
settings.  
8. Click Apply.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
29  
 
Administrative Tools  
Setting PDL Emulations  
To set the PDL (Page Description Language) Emulations, used by the printer's Input Ports, perform the  
following steps:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Services folder.  
5. Click the Printing folder, then the Language Emulations folder.to see the Page Description  
Languages currently supported by system software.  
6. Click Print Mode to access a list of the printer's Input Ports, displaying the Page Description  
Language emulations they are currently set to use.  
7. Depending upon the Ports enabled at the printer, the list of displayed Ports includes: Parallel,  
AppleTalk (with PostScript), SMB, LPD, IPP, WSD, and Port 9100. Typical Page Description  
selections for each Port include: Auto (auto select), PostScript, HP-GL/2, PCL and TIFF/JPEG.  
8. Click Apply.  
Banner Sheet Printing  
When documents are sent to print at the printer, a banner sheet is printed identifying the PC that sent  
the print job. The banner sheet is printed on paper from a selected tray. When the selected tray is  
empty, the printer will automatically switch to another tray with the same size paper and print the  
banner sheet from that tray. The printer will continue to print banner sheets from this secondary tray  
until the selected tray is refilled.  
To set banner sheet printing and select a banner sheet paper tray:  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Touch System Settings.  
6. In the Group column, touch Print Service Settings.  
7. In the Features column, touch Other Settings.  
8. On the Other Settings screen, in the Items column, touch Banner Sheet, then touch Change  
Settings.  
9. On the Banner Sheet screen, select one of the following:  
Off  
Start Sheet (the default choice)  
End Sheet  
Start Sheet & End Sheet  
10. Touch Save.  
30  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
CentreWare Internet Services  
11. To select a banner sheet tray:  
a. On the Other Settings screen, in the Items column, touch Banner Sheet Tray, then touch  
Change Settings.  
b. Select the tray that will hold the banner sheet paper.  
c. Tray 3 is the suggested choice, with Tray 4 as the secondary tray.  
12. Touch Save.  
Set the Ethernet Speed  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Physical Connections folder.  
5. Click Ethernet.  
6. Select your network speed from the drop down list.  
7. Click Apply, then click Reboot Machine.  
Configure TCP/IP Settings  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
4. Click TCP/IP.  
5. Review the available selections as displayed on your screen and explained in the TCP/IP  
Configuration Selection List, below.  
6. Accept the default Host Name, or type in your own unique Host Name for this printer.  
7. Select the desired method for obtaining an IP Address.  
8. If Static is selected, type in the addresses that apply for IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway.  
Caution: Changing the IP address for the printer will affect NetBIOS/IP, LPR/LPD, FTP, SNMP, and Port  
9100 printing. It will also interrupt the ability to communicate with the printer using the  
CentreWare Internet Services. When you change the printer's IP Address, make sure to print out a  
Configuration Report so that you have a record of the TCP/IP addresses for use with computers that  
need to communicate with the printer using TCP/IP.  
Note: If DHCP or BOOTP addressing method is selected, you cannot manually change the IP Address,  
Subnet Mask, or Gateway. Select Manual if you wish to manually enter these addresses.  
Note: When using DHCP, set a reasonably long Lease Time for the IP Address so that the printer can be  
restarted, when taken out of service for maintenance, without being assigned a new IP Address.  
Note: Upon rebooting, when the system comes up, if it can’t locate a DHCP server on the network it will  
use whatever IP address it was previously configured with.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
31  
Administrative Tools  
9. Determine the method to use to supply the DNS Server IP Addresses (to resolve Host Names with  
IP Addresses).  
10. Determine whether or not Dynamic DNS should be enabled.  
11. Click Apply, then click Reboot Machine.  
TCP/IP Configuration Selection List  
As displayed on your screen, the following selections are available for TCP/IP Configuration.  
IP Mode: Select the IP Mode that applies to your network environment.  
General  
Host Name: The default entry assures a name that is unique to this device on the network.  
IP Address Resolution: Use this drop down menu to select the method to use to assign IP  
Addresses. Select Static, DHCP, RARP, BOOTP, or DHCP/Autonet. Note that with the Autonet  
option selected, if a Windows 2000 client can’t contact the DHCP server, it will assign itself an  
IP address from the 169.254.0.0 class B address space. This is also known as zero configuration,  
or Bonjour, networking. Make sure to check the Enabled box for Self Assigned Address at the  
bottom of your screen.  
IP Address: To be filled in manually only when Static addressing is selected.  
Subnet Mask: To be filled in manually only when Static addressing is selected.  
Gateway Address: To be filled in manually only when Static addressing is selected.  
Domain Name: Enter the fully qualified domain name here. For example: xerox.com.  
DNS Configuration  
DNS Server Address Resolution: If enabled with a check mark, the printer will contact the  
DHCP Server for the IP Addresses of up to three DNS Servers. If unchecked, this information  
must be entered manually.  
Three DNS Address boxes are supplied for the manual entry of DNS Server addresses.  
Dynamic DNS Update: If your DNS Server does not support dynamic IP address updates there  
is no need to enable this check box. Check the Overwrite box to enable DNS information  
overwriting.  
Generate Domain Search List Automatically: A check box is provided for enabling automatic  
Domain searches.  
Domain Names 1,2,3: Three text boxes are provided for the entry of Domains to search (for  
example, Xerox.com).  
Connection Timeout: An entry box is provided for entering a Timeout for searches of Domains.  
Zero Configuration Networking: Used with DHCP/Autonet selected from the IP Address  
Resolution drop down menu, when this box is checked the printer will assign itself an IP address  
from the 169.254.0.0 class B address space.  
Note: Changes to TCP/IP settings will not be applied until you restart (reboot) the printer.  
32  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
CentreWare Internet Services  
Configure LPD  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
5. Select LPD in the directory tree.  
6. The available selections include:  
Port Number: (Default value is 515.) As this is the port for the TCP Spooler assigned by the  
IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority), the default value should not need to be  
changed.  
TBCP Filter: (Displayed when PostScript is enabled).  
Connection Time-Out  
Maximum Number of Sessions: Enter the maximum number of simultaneously connected  
hosts for this interface.  
7. Enter a Time Out value for jobs being sent to the printer through this port. This is the length of  
time that the controller will wait for an end of job command before printing the current job.  
8. Click the Apply to accept the changes, or Undo to return the settings to their previous values.  
Note: Changes to settings are not applied until you restart the printer. A Reboot Machine button is  
available on the Status Tab of CentreWare Internet Services.  
Configure SNMP  
It is possible to remotely define and modify GET (Read Only), SET (Read/Write), and Trap SNMP  
(Simple Network Management Protocol) community names for the printer. You can also enter the  
System Administrator's Name here for packet identification purposes.  
SNMP Community Name properties that can be configured  
Community Name (Read Only): This is the password for SNMP GET requests from the SNMP  
Manager to the Agent in the printer. Applications, such as Xerox Printer Map or CentreWare  
Conductor, obtaining information from the printer by SNMP use this password.  
Community Name (Read/Write): This is the password for SNMP SET requests from the SNMP  
Manager to the Agent in the printer. Applications, such as Xerox Printer Map or CentreWare  
Conductor, which set information on the printer by SNMP use this password.  
Community Name (Trap Notification): This is the default password for SNMP TRAPS sent from  
the printer to the Manager by SNMP.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
33  
Administrative Tools  
Configuring SNMP Community Names in CentreWare Internet Services  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
5. Select SNMP Configuration in the directory tree, and check the Enable box for the version desired.  
6. Enter a name for Community Name (Read Only), also known as GET.  
7. Enter a name for Community Name (Read/Write), also known as SET.  
Caution: Caution: If you change the GET and/or SET Community Names, you must also change the  
names in all network applications that are communicating by SNMP with this printer.  
8. Enter a name for Community Name (Trap Notification). This is the default password for SNMP  
TRAPS sent from the printer to the Manager by SNMP.  
9. Optionally enter the System Administrator's name for packet identification purposes.  
10. Select a trap and click Edit in the Trap Notification Settings section.  
11. Select your transport method (IPX or UDP) and fill in the trap destination information for your  
selected method.  
12. Select the event(s) that you wish to report on by checking the applicable box(es).  
13. Click Apply to accept the changes, or the Undo button to return the settings to their previous  
values.  
Note: Changes to settings will not be applied until you restart the printer. A Reboot Machine button is  
available on the Status Tab of CentreWare Internet Services.  
Configuring IPP  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
5. Select IPP in the directory tree.  
6. The available selections include:  
Port Number Static Display: This is the port number assigned by IANA (Internet Assigned  
Numbers Authority. The default value is 631.  
Additional Port Number: You can enter port 80 (HTTP) here as a backup port.  
TBCP Filter: Displayed when PostScript is enabled.  
Administrator Mode: This is disabled by default.  
DNS  
Connection Time-out  
7. Select the DNS check box. The DNS Server will be available to resolve Host Names to IP Addresses,  
in support of printing with IPP.  
34  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
CentreWare Internet Services  
8. Enter a Connection Time Out value for jobs being sent to the printer through this Port. This is the  
length of time that the Controller will wait for an end of job command before printing the current  
job.  
9. Click Apply to accept changes, or Undo to return settings to their previous values.  
Note: Setting changes are not applied until you restart the printer. There is a Reboot Machine button  
on the Status tab of CentreWare Internet Services.  
Modify the HTTP (Internet Services) Settings  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
5. Select HTTP in the directory tree.  
6. The available selections include:  
Port Number: The default value is 80, which is the HTTP Port number assigned by the IANA  
(Internet Assigned Numbers Authority). This default value should not need to be changed.  
Maximum Connections  
Connection Time-out  
Secure HTTP (SSL): Select the check box to set all HTTP communications with the printer to  
encrypted communications. If you do this you will have to have a digital certificate installed on  
the printer. For more information see Configuration of HTTPS (SSL/TLS) Communication  
Secure HTTP Port Number: HTTP traffic will be routed to this port when using HTTP with SSL  
encryption.  
7. In the Maximum Connections entry box, accept the default value, or enter a number for the  
maximum number of hosts (networked computers) that can be connected to the printer's HTTP  
Server (CentreWare Internet Services) at one time.  
8. In the Connection Time-Out entry box, accept the default value, or enter the number of seconds  
that a browser connection can remain open without any activity.  
9. Click Apply to apply setting changes, or Undo to return settings to their previous values.  
Note: Setting changes are not applied until you restart the printer. There is a Reboot Machine button  
on the Status Tab of CentreWare Internet Services.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
35  
Administrative Tools  
Configure WSD (Web Services on Devices)  
As stated by Microsoft, WSD is Microsoft’s implementation of the printers Profile for Web Services  
(DPWS) standard, a specification that enables devices, such as printers, cell phones, cameras, and  
home entertainment centers, to use standard Web-based protocols (HTTP and UDP) to discover one  
another, advertise their services over the IP (versions 4 or 6) network, and report on their operational  
status.  
Typically, a device such as a network printer will use a small amount of flash memory to store WSD-  
related information. The WSD device then advertises a primary endpoint that can be located through  
WS-Discovery (via UDP) on a Windows Vista client.  
The endpoint supplies metadata about itself through WS-Metadata Transfer. This information typically  
includes manufacturer, device information, and service host metadata (information on offered  
services).  
WSD provides two way communication, enabling a printer to both receive jobs and to send status  
notifications to Windows clients when events occur, such as supplies running low.  
To configure this printer for WSD, perform the following steps.  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
5. Select WSD in the directory tree.  
6. The available selections include:  
Port Number: Enter the port number between 1 and 65535. Port 80 is the recommended HTTP  
default. Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.  
TBCP Filter: Check to enable TBCP Filter when PostScript data is to be processed. This is only  
available when the optional PostScript 3 kit is installed. When the transmission data includes  
binary data or EPS data, disable this. For Windows, follow the Output Protocol setting in the  
printer Settings tab of the Properties screen of the print driver.  
Data Receive Time-Out: Enter the timeout period for receiving data from WSD clients between  
1 and 65535 seconds in 1 second increments.  
Notification Delivery Time-Out: Enter the timeout period for notification delivery to WSD  
clients between 1 and 60 seconds in 1 second increments.  
Maximum TTL: The Time to Live setting (in seconds) for undelivered IP datagrams (such as  
UDP being used with WSD). Enter a value 1 and 10.  
Maximum Number of Subscribers: Enter the maximum number of clients for reserved  
notification between 1 and 200.  
7. Click Apply to apply setting changes, or the Undo button to return settings to their previous values.  
Note: Setting changes are not applied until you restart the printer. There is a convenient button on the  
Status Tab of CentreWare Internet Services.  
36  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
CentreWare Internet Services  
Configure Port 9100 (Raw Printing)  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
5. Select Port 9100.  
6. The available selections include:  
TCP Port Number: The default is 9100. This does not need to be changed.  
TBCP Filter: Displayed when PostScript is enabled.  
Connection Time-Out  
7. Enter a Time Out value for jobs being sent to the printer through this port. This is the length of time  
that the Controller will wait for an end of job command before printing the current job.  
8. Click Apply to accept changes, or Undo to return settings to their previous values.  
Note: Setting changes are not applied until you restart the printer.  
Note: If Port 9100 is not displayed in the Properties Tab directory tree, click Port Status in the directory  
tree. Use your mouse to place a check mark in the check box on the Port 9100 line. Click the Apply  
button, then click the Reboot Machine button (always available on the Status Tab) to remotely reboot  
the printer.  
IP Filtering (IP Address Restriction)  
Using CentreWare Internet Services, access to the printer's Services can be restricted by Host IP  
Address.  
To restrict device access, perform the following steps:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Security folder.  
5. Select IP Filtering.  
6. Choose which IP Filtering to apply depending upon the address space used with your network.  
Note that IPv4 is the traditional (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) address space used with TCP/IP networks.  
IP Filter Enablement: If enabled with a check mark, access to the printer's services will be  
restricted to the list of IP Addresses and Subnet Masks specified by clicking the Edit button. If  
disabled (unchecked), host access to the printer is universal (unrestricted).  
Add or Edit: When this button is clicked, a list of ten lines of IP Address and Subnet Mask entry  
boxes is displayed. Sometimes referred to as a restriction list, this list is used to supply the IP  
Addresses and Subnet Masks of up to ten hosts (individual computers) that are authorized to  
access the printer's services. All other hosts, not specified in this list, will be prevented from  
accessing the printer's services.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
37  
 
Administrative Tools  
7. Click Apply when done.  
Note: Changes to settings are not applied until you restart the printer. A Reboot Machine button is  
available on the Status Tab of CentreWare Internet Services.  
Configure EtherTalk (AppleTalk)  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols file folder.  
5. Select EtherTalk in the directory tree.  
Note: If EtherTalk is not displayed in the Properties Tab directory tree, click the Port Settings in the  
directory tree. Use your mouse to place a check mark in the check box on the EtherTalk line. Click the  
Apply button.  
6. The available selections include:  
Printer Name  
Zone Name  
7. Enter the name that you wish to assign to this printer. This is the name that will appear in the  
Chooser.  
8. Either accept the default zone of * which lets the closest router assign the printer to a zone, or  
assign the printer to a zone (with a 32 character naming limit).  
9. Click the Apply button to accept changes, or Undo to return settings to their previous values.  
Note: Changes to settings are not applied until you restart the printer. A Reboot Machine button is  
available on the Status Tab of CentreWare Internet Services.  
E-mail, SMTP, and POP3 Settings  
You can change E-mail, SMTP, and POP3 settings in CentreWare Internet Services. For complete  
information on required E-mail settings, see Scan to E-mail on page 100.  
Bonjour (if available)  
Bonjour (also called Zero-Configuration Networking) allows devices to communicate using 169.254/16  
IPv4 addressing, over the same physical or logical (such as in ad hoc, or isolated (non- DHCP)  
networks).  
When the Bonjour protocol is enabled on ALL communicating devices, and those devices are  
connected, Host names of the individual devices will be resolved to IPv4 addressing, without the use of  
a DNS server, and IP communications can then take place.  
38  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
CentreWare Internet Services  
To view the Host Name and Printer Name automatically assigned to this machine under Bonjour, do  
the following:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Properties tab.  
5. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
6. Click Bonjour.  
Note: If Bonjour is not displayed in the Properties tab, click Port Settings and check Bonjour. Click  
Apply. If Bonjour is not available in the Port Settings list, click TCP/IP in the Protocols folder, and scroll  
to the bottom of the displayed page to Zero-Configuration networking.  
7. Make a note of the Host Name and Printer Name for reference in working with other Bonjour (zero-  
configuration) connected computers.  
Note: You can change these names, however the Host Name must be unique on the network. The  
automatically generated Host Name should assure its uniqueness. The Host Name has a 32 character  
limit, while the Printer Name has a 62 character limit. If you change either name, be sure to click Apply.  
You can reboot the printer remotely using the Reboot Machine button, which is available on the Status  
Tab of CentreWare Internet Services.  
Support Tab  
Click Change Settings to edit the contact information.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
39  
 
Administrative Tools  
40  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Network Management  
General  
Ethernet Speed Setting  
The printer's Ethernet Interface has speed settings of Auto (10/100Base-TX, 100Base-TX (Half or Full  
Duplex), and 10Base-TX (Half or Full Duplex). By default the Ethernet Port Configuration is set to Auto.  
To Change the Network Speed  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Press Connectivity & Network Setup.  
6. Press Protocol Settings.  
7. When the Protocol Settings menu displays, the selection line labeled Ethernet Rated Speed.  
8. Press the Change Settings button.  
9. On the Ethernet Rated Speed screen note which one of the buttons is highlighted as the current  
setting for Ethernet speed. The available settings are Auto (default), 100 Mbps Full Duplex, 100  
Mbps Half Duplex, 10 Mbps Full Duplex, 10 Mbps Half Duplex.  
10. To change settings, press your setting of choice, then press the Save button.  
11. To exit the Ethernet Setting screen, without making any changes, press the Cancel button.  
12. To exit the Protocol Settings menu, returning to the Tools tab, press the Close button.  
13. Wait several seconds and the Auto Clear service should log you out.  
Note: Note that if you changed any settings in the Protocol Settings menu, the printer will  
automatically reboot to register and enable your new settings.  
42  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
TCP/IP Protocol Configuration  
TCP/IP Protocol Configuration  
To view or change the settings of the printer's TCP/IP Protocol Configuration, perform the following  
steps:  
Accessing TCP/IP Protocol Settings at the Printer  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Press Connectivity & Network Setup.  
6. Press Protocol Settings.  
7. When the Protocol Settings menu displays, note that with the exception of selection one (Ethernet  
Rated Speed), the remaining selections are specific to TCP/IP address settings. Choose your setting  
by pressing the numbered, horizontal selection line on the touch screen. Note that the current  
status of each setting is shown on the applicable line. After pressing a selection line, to access  
available settings press the Change Settings button in the lower right corner of the touch screen.  
TCP/IP – IP Mode  
1. Press the selection line labeled TCP/IP – Mode.  
2. Press Change Settings.  
3. Select the IP Mode best suited to your network environment. Note that your choices include IPv4  
Mode, IPv6 Mode, and Dual Stack. The printer supports IPv6 addressing with an automatically-  
built Local Address for broadcasting to routers that can supply the network layer configuration  
parameters.  
4. For traditional networks (using an address space of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx), select IPv4 and press Save.  
5. Note that the printer may reboot.  
IP Address Resolution  
1. On the Protocol Settings menu, press the selection line labeled IPv4 (or other mode) Address  
Resolution.  
2. Press the Change Settings button.  
3. On the settings screen, note which one of the buttons is highlighted as the current setting for the  
TCP/IP Addressing method. The available settings are DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, DHCP/Autonet, and  
STATIC. DHCP/Autonet is the default setting.  
4. To change settings, press your selection of choice, then press the Save button.  
5. To exit the screen, without making any changes, press the Cancel button.  
6. Press Close and, if you made any changes, the system will reboot.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
43  
     
Network Management  
IPv4 IP Address  
1. Used for static IP Addressing (with STATIC selected as your addressing method), on the Protocol  
Settings menu, press the selection line labeled IPv4 Address. Note that the IP Address may be  
viewed, but not changed, with dynamic addressing enabled.  
2. Press the Change Settings button.  
3. On the settings screen, use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate IP Address.  
4. To save settings, press the Save button.  
5. To exit the screen, without making any changes, press the Cancel button.  
IPv4 Subnet Mask  
1. Used for static IP Addressing (with STATIC selected as your addressing method), on the Protocol  
Settings menu, press the selection line labeled IPv4 Subnet Mask. Note that the Subnet Mask may  
be viewed, but not changed, with dynamic addressing enabled.  
2. Press the Change Settings button.  
3. On the settings screen, use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate Subnet Mask.  
4. To save settings, press the Save button.  
5. To exit the screen, without making any changes, press the Cancel button.  
IPv4 Gateway Address  
1. Used for static IP Addressing (with STATIC selected as your addressing method), on the Protocol  
Settings menu, press the selection line labeled IPv4 Gateway Address. Note that the Gateway  
address may be viewed, but not changed, with dynamic addressing enabled.  
2. Press the Change Settings button.  
3. On the settings screen, use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate gateway.  
4. To save settings, press the Save button.  
5. To exit the screen, without making any changes, press the Cancel button.  
IPv4 IP Filter (IP Address Restriction)  
Note: Before enabling the IPv4 IP filter, open CentreWare Internet Services on your computer. This will  
prevent you from accidentally disabling communication with the printer from your computer (blocking  
your own IP address).  
1. In the Protocol Settings menu, press the selection line labeled IPv4 IP Filter.  
2. Press the Change Settings button.  
3. On the settings screen, note which of the two buttons is highlighted as the current setting for IP  
Address restriction. The available settings are Enabled or Disabled. Disabled is the factory default  
setting.  
4. To change settings, press your setting of choice, then press the Save button.  
5. To return to the Protocol Settings menu, without making changes, press the Cancel button.  
44  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
TCP/IP Protocol Configuration  
Exiting the Protocol Settings Menu and Returning to the Tools Tab  
1. To exit the Protocol Settings menu, returning to the Tools tab, press the Close button in the upper  
right corner of the Protocol Settings menu screen.  
2. Wait several seconds and the Auto Clear service should log you out.  
Note: If you changed any settings in the Protocol Settings menu, the printer will automatically reboot  
to register and enable your new settings.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
45  
Network Management  
TCP/IP LPD Enablement  
To support TCP/IP printing through the computer's LPR port in the case of Windows XP, the LPD (Line  
Printer Daemon) must be enabled at the printer.  
Changing LPD Settings at the Printer  
To view or change the printer's LPD setting, perform the following steps:  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Press Connectivity & Network Setup.  
6. Press Port Settings.  
7. When the Port Settings menu displays, press the selection line labeled LPD.  
8. Press the Change Settings button in the lower right corner of the Port Settings menu screen.  
9. When the LPD selections menu displays, note that you have a choice of setting selections by  
numbered horizontal lines, with the current status of each setting shown. The Close button in the  
upper right corner of the screen returns you to the Port Settings menu. After pressing the selection,  
to access available settings press the Change Settings button in the lower right corner of the touch  
screen.  
Port Status (LPD Enablement)  
1. On the LPD selections menu, press the selection line labeled Port Status.  
2. Press the Change Settings button.  
3. On the LPD Port Status screen, note which of the two buttons is highlighted as the current setting  
for LPD Enablement. The available settings are Enabled or Disabled. For the LPD to function, it  
must be set to Enabled.  
4. To change settings, press your setting of choice, then press the Save button.  
5. To exit the screen, without making any changes, press the Cancel button.  
LPD Port Number  
1. On the LPD selections menu, press the selection line labeled LPD Port Number.  
2. Press the Change Settings button.  
3. Note the setting of Port 515, which is the recommended, default value. To change the setting, use  
the keypad displayed on screen.  
4. To change settings, press your setting of choice, then press the Save button.  
5. To exit the screen, without making any changes, press the Cancel button.  
46  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
     
TCP/IP LPD Enablement  
LPD Maximum Number of Sessions  
1. Select LPD – Maximum Number of Sessions.  
2. Press Change Settings.  
3. Select a number from 1 to 10.  
4. To change settings, press Save.  
5. To exit, without making changes, press Cancel.  
Exiting the LPD Selections Menu  
To exit the LPD selections menu, which returns you to the Port Settings menu, press the Close button in  
the upper right corner of the touch screen.  
Exiting the Port Settings Menu and Returning to the Tools Tab  
1. To exit the Port Settings menu, returning to the printer's Tools screen, press the Close button in the  
upper right corner of the Port Settings menu screen.  
2. Wait several seconds and the Auto Clear service should log you out.  
Note: If you changed any settings in the Port Settings menu, the printer will automatically reboot to  
register and enable your new settings.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
47  
Network Management  
TCP/IP Dynamic Addressing  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
5. Click TCP/IP.  
6. Review the available selections as displayed on your screen and explained in the TCP/IP  
Configuration Selection List, below.  
7. Accept the default Host Name, or type in your own unique Host Name for this printer.  
8. Select DHCP or BOOTP as your method for obtaining an IP Address.  
Caution: Changing the IP address for the printer will affect LPR/LPD, FTP, SNMP, and Port 9100  
printing. It will also interrupt the ability to communicate with the printer using  
CentreWare Internet Services. When you change the printer's IP Address, make sure to print out a  
Configuration Report so that you have a record of the TCP/IP addresses for use with computers that  
need to communicate with the printer using TCP/IP.  
Note: When using DHCP, set a reasonably long Lease Time for the IP Address so that the printer can be  
shut down and serviced, when required, without being continuously assigned a new IP Address.  
Note: Upon rebooting, when the system comes up, if it can’t locate a DHCP server on the network it will  
use whatever IP address it was previously configured with.  
9. Determine the method to use to supply the DNS Server IP Addresses (to resolve Host Names with  
IP Addresses).  
10. Determine whether or not Dynamic DNS should be enabled.  
11. Click Apply when done.  
TCP/IP Configuration Selection List  
As displayed on your screen, the following selections are available for TCP/IP Configuration.  
IP Mode  
Select the IP Mode that applies to your network environment.  
General  
Host Name: The default entry assures a name that is unique to this device on the network.  
IP Address Resolution: Use this drop down menu to select the method to use to assign IP  
Addresses. Select STATIC, DHCP, RARP, BOOTP, or DHCP/Autonet.  
48  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
TCP/IP Dynamic Addressing  
Note that with the Autonet option selected, if a Windows 2000 client can’t contact the DHCP server, it  
will assign itself an IP address from the 169.254.0.0 class B address space. This is also known as zero  
configuration, or Bonjour, networking. Make sure to check the Enabled box for Self Assigned Address at  
the bottom of your screen.  
IP Address: To be filled in manually only when Static addressing is selected.  
Subnet Mask: To be filled in manually only when Static addressing is selected.  
Gateway Address: To be filled in manually only when Static addressing is selected.  
Domain Name  
Enter the fully qualified domain name here. For example: xerox.com.  
DNS Configuration  
DHCP Address Resolution: If enabled with a check mark, the printer will contact the DHCP Server  
for the IP Addresses of up to three DNS Servers. If unchecked, this information must be entered  
manually.  
DNS Server Addresses  
Dynamic DNS Update: If your DNS Server does not support dynamic IP address updates there is  
no need to enable this check box. Check the Overwrite box to enable DNS information overwriting.  
Generate Domain Search List Automatically: A check box is provided for enabling automatic  
Domain searches.  
Domain Names 1,2,3: Three text boxes are provided for the entry of Domains to search (for  
example, Xerox.com).  
Connection Timeout: An entry box is provided for entering a Timeout for searches of Domains.  
Zero Configuration Networking  
Used with DHCP/Autonet selected from the IP Address Resolution drop down menu, when this box is  
checked the printer will assign itself an IP address from the 169.254.0.0 class B address space.  
Changes to TCP/IP settings will not be applied until you restart (reboot) the printer.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
49  
Network Management  
IP Filtering (IP Address Restriction)  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Properties Tab.  
5. Click the Security folder.  
6. Select IP Filtering.  
7. In either the IPv4 area or the IPv6 area, complete the following steps.  
Note: IPv4 is the traditional (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) address space used with TCP/IP networks.  
a. To allow universal, unrestricted access to the printer, clear the Enabled check box.  
b. To restrict access to specific IP Addresses and Subnet Masks:  
Click the Enabled check box.  
Click Add or Edit to add or edit an IP address from which you intend to accept jobs. Click Apply.  
Note: IP filtering will not work until at least one IP address has been added. This prevents turning off  
ALL access to the printer.  
Click Delete to delete an IP address. Click Apply.  
8. Click Apply when done.  
9. Send a test job.  
50  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Configure Port 9100 (Raw Printing)  
Configure Port 9100 (Raw Printing)  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder on the left, then the Protocols folder.  
5. Select Port 9100 in the directory tree.  
6. The available selections include:  
TCP Port Number: The default value is 9100. This typically does not need to be changed.  
End of Job Timeout: Enter a Time Out value for jobs being sent to the printer through this  
Port. This is the length of time that the Controller will wait for an end of job command before  
printing the current job.  
TBCP Filter: A check box (displayed when PostScript is enabled).  
7. Click the Apply button to accept changes, or the Undo button to return settings to their previous  
values.  
Note: Setting changes are not applied until you restart the printer.  
Note: If Port 9100 is not displayed in the Properties Tab directory tree, click the Port Status in the  
Connectivity folder in the tree. In the Port Status table, use your mouse to place a check mark in the  
check box on the Port 9100 line. Click the Apply button, then click the Reboot button (always available  
on the Status Tab) to remotely reboot the printer.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
51  
   
Network Management  
Microsoft (NetBIOS over IP) Networks  
Before You Start  
1. Print a Configuration Report. See Configuration Report on page 22.  
2. Referring to the report, verify that SMB is enabled. To enable SMB at the printer, if required, follow  
the procedure below.  
3. Referring to the Configuration Report, verify that DNS is enabled. The use of Naming Servers is  
required to resolve NetBIOS device names to IP addresses for packet routing over the TCP/IP  
network.  
4. To enable the printer to communicate with the Naming Servers, see TCP/IP Dynamic Addressing on  
5. When using WINS or DNS, be sure to refer to your Server Operating System documentation for the  
appropriate procedure to use to enable NetBIOS name to IP address resolution on the Server.  
Enabling SMB Setting at the Printer  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Press Connectivity & Network Setup.  
6. Press Port Settings.  
7. When the Port Settings menu displays, press the SMB selection line.  
8. Press the Change Settings button in the lower right corner of the Port Settings menu screen.  
9. When the SMB selection menu displays, note that you have only one setting available on a single,  
numbered horizontal line. Press this selection line.  
10. Press the Change Settings button.  
11. On the SMB Port Status screen, note which of the two buttons is highlighted as the current setting  
for SMB Enablement. The available settings are Enabled or Disabled. To enable SMB at the printer,  
select the Enabled setting.  
12. Press the Save button on the touch screen, which returns you to the SMB selection menu. (To exit  
the screen, without making changes, press the Cancel button.)  
13. Exit the SMB selection menu and return to the Port Settings menu by pressing the Close button in  
the upper right corner of the touch screen.  
14. Exit the Port Settings menu by pressing the Close button in the upper right corner of the Port  
Settings menu screen.  
15. To exit the Tools screen, wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
52  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Microsoft (NetBIOS over IP) Networks  
Viewing or Configuring the SMB Host Name or WINS Server  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Properties Tab.  
5. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
6. Select Microsoft Networking in the directory tree.  
7. The available selections include:  
Transport  
Maximum Connections  
Workgroup Name  
SMB Host Name  
TBCP Filter: (Displayed when PostScript is enabled).  
An enabling check box for supporting Unicode (supplying the Host name and Workgroup name  
in Unicode characters during SMB transmission).  
An enabling check box for Auto Master Mode. When the master browser for the workgroup  
cannot be found, if this box is checked, this host will become the master browser.  
An enabling check box for Password Encryption (during SMB transmission).  
WINS Server: For using a WINS Server to resolve NetBIOS names (SMB host names) to IP  
addresses.  
8. Select TCP/IP from the Transport menu.  
9. Accept the default value, or enter a value from 3 to 10, for maximum number of connections  
allowed in Maximum Connections.  
10. Accept the Workgroup name shown, or enter your own workgroup name.  
11. Either accept the default SMB Host Name, which is automatically built by the printer to assure the  
name's uniqueness, or enter your preferred name. Note that this will be the NetBIOS name that is  
resolved by the Naming Server (DNS or WINS) to an IP Address for the printer.  
12. If using a WINS server, enable the WINS Server Address Resolution check box. When enabled, the  
printer will contact the DHCP Server for the IP Addresses of the Primary and Secondary WINS  
(Windows Internet Naming Service) Servers. Note that two IP Address lines, with entry boxes, are  
provided for manual entry (when DHCP is not selected).  
13. To apply setting changes, click the Apply button, then click the Reboot button to reboot the printer.  
To exit without making any changes, click the Undo button.  
Note: To use the printer's NetBIOS name over the TCP/IP Network, the DNS and WINS Servers must be  
configured for NetBIOS name to IP address resolution. Also, make sure that the printer is informed of  
the addresses of the DNS/WINS Servers. For more information see TCP/IP Dynamic Addressing on  
Setting Up a Computer to Print Directly to the printer  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
53  
Network Management  
IPP Configuration  
The Internet Printing Protocol provides a convenient way to print over the Internet or Intranet using  
the printer's IP address. To support this type of printing, make sure that Port 9100 is enabled at the  
printer. Click Port Status in the Connectivity folder on the Properties Tab of CentreWare Internet  
Services and make sure that the check box on the Port 9100 line is checked. The Internet Printing  
Protocol must also be enabled at the printer, and the Internet Print Service must be available and  
installed on the individual computer's version of Windows. IPP support is already built into Windows  
operating systems. For other desktop operating systems it is available as a download from Microsoft at  
www.microsoft.com. The final step is to install the IPP print driver. For more information, see Print  
Changing IPP Settings at the Printer  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Press Connectivity & Network Setup.  
6. Press Port Settings.  
7. Press the IPP selection line on the Port Settings menu.  
8. Press the Change Settings button in the lower right corner of the Port Settings menu screen.  
9. When the IPP selection menu displays, note that you have two selections available on numbered  
horizontal lines. The first selection is Port Status. The second is IPP – Added Port Number. The Close  
button in the upper right corner of the screen returns you to the Port Settings menu. After pressing  
the horizontal line selection, to access available settings press the Change Settings button in the  
lower right corner of the touch screen.  
Port Status (IPP Enablement)  
1. On the IPP selection menu, press Port Status.  
2. Press the Change Settings button.  
3. On the IPP Port Status screen, note which of the two buttons is highlighted as the current setting  
for IPP Enablement. The available settings are Enabled or Disabled. To print with IPP, this setting  
must be Enabled.  
4. To change settings, press your setting of choice, then press the Save button.  
5. To exit the screen, without making any changes, press the Cancel button.  
54  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
     
IPP Configuration  
IPP – Added Port Number  
Note: If you just enabled the IPP port, the machine may have to reboot before you can view or change  
the Port Number.  
1. On the IPP Selection menu, press the selection line labeled IPP – Added Port Number.  
2. Press the Change Settings button.  
3. Use the displayed keypad to add a Port Number, such as 80 (the displayed default for HTTP).  
4. To save the setting, press Save.  
5. To exit the screen, without making any changes, press Cancel.  
Exiting the IPP Selection Menu  
To exit the IPP selection menu, which returns you to the Port Settings menu, press the Close button in  
the upper right corner of the touch screen.  
Exiting the Port Settings Menu and Returning to the Tools Tab  
1. To exit the Port Settings menu, returning to the Tools screen, press the Close button in the upper  
right corner of the Port Settings menu screen.  
2. Wait several seconds and the Auto Clear service should log you out.  
Note: If you changed any settings in the Port Settings menu, the printer will automatically reboot to  
register and enable your new settings.  
Configuring IPP Settings with CentreWare Internet Services  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
5. Click IPP.  
6. The available selections include:  
Port Number: The default value is 631. This is the port number assigned by IANA (Internet  
Assigned Numbers Authority.  
Add Port Number  
TBCP Filter: Displayed when PostScript is enabled.  
Administrator Mode: This is disabled by default.  
DNS Enablement  
Connection Timeout  
7. Verify that DNS is checked (Enabled) by default. If enabled, the DNS Server will resolve Host  
Names to IP Addresses, in support of printing with IPP.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
55  
Network Management  
8. Enter a Time Out value for jobs being sent to the printer through this Port. This is the length of  
time that the Controller will wait for an end of job command before printing the current job.  
9. Click the Apply button to accept changes, or the Undo button to return settings to their previous  
values.  
Note: Setting changes are not applied until you restart the printer.  
56  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
EtherTalk (AppleTalk) Configuration  
EtherTalk (AppleTalk) Configuration  
The EtherTalk Protocol enables computer to printer communications over the EtherTalk (AppleTalk)  
network.  
Changing EtherTalk Settings at the Printer  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Press Connectivity & Network Setup.  
6. Press Port Settings.  
7. Press the EtherTalk selection line on the Port Settings menu.  
8. Press the Change Settings button in the lower right corner of the Port Settings menu screen.  
9. When the EtherTalk selection menu displays, note that you have only one selection available on a  
single, numbered horizontal line, with the current status of this setting shown. The Close button in  
the upper right corner of the screen returns you to the Port Settings menu. After pressing the  
horizontal line selection, to access available settings press the Change Settings button in the lower  
right corner of the touch screen.  
Port Status (EtherTalk Enablement)  
1. On the EtherTalk selection menu, press the selection line labeled Port Status.  
2. Press the Change Settings button.  
3. On the Port Status screen, note which of the two buttons is highlighted as the current setting for  
EtherTalk Enablement. The available settings are Enabled or Disabled. To print with EtherTalk, this  
setting must be Enabled.  
4. To change settings, press your setting of choice, then press the Save button.  
5. To exit the screen, without making any changes, press the Cancel button.  
Exiting the EtherTalk Selection Menu  
To exit the EtherTalk selection menu, which returns you to the Port Settings menu, press the Close  
button in the upper right corner of the touch screen.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
57  
     
Network Management  
Exiting the Port Settings Menu and Returning to the Tools Tab  
1. To exit the Port Settings menu, returning to the Tools screen, press the Close button in the upper  
right corner of the Port Settings menu screen.  
2. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
Note: If you changed any settings in the Port Settings menu, the printer will automatically reboot to  
register and enable your new settings.  
Configuring EtherTalk Settings with CentreWare Internet Services  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
5. Click AppleTalk (EtherTalk).  
Note: If this selection is unavailable, click Port Status, check the EtherTalk box, then click Apply.  
6. The available selections include:  
Printer Name: Enter the name that you wish to assign to this Printer. This is the name that will  
appear in the Chooser.  
Zone Name: Either accept the default zone of * which lets the closest router assign the printer  
to a zone, or assign the printer to a zone (with a 32 character naming limit).  
7. Click Apply to accept changes, or Undo to return settings to their previous values.  
Note: Setting changes are not applied until you restart (reboot) the printer.  
58  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
AS400 Printing  
AS400 Printing  
AS400 Raw TCP/IP Printing to Port 9100 (CRTDEVPRT)  
This is the procedure to set up printing to a printer from an AS/400 using the SNMP drivers. This  
procedure is intended for users familiar with the AS/400 system, especially those experienced with  
printing in an AS/400 environment. The AS/400 must run V4R5 of OS/400 so that the SNMP drivers are  
present (or V4R3/V4R4 with the most current PTFs installed). The printer must have port 9100 enabled.  
To enable port 9100  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder.  
5. Click the Protocols folder.  
6. Select Port 9100 in the directory tree.  
7. Ensure the Enabled box is checked to enable Raw TCP/IP Printing.  
8. Leave the TCP Port Number set to 9100 for Port 1.  
9. Leave the Bidirectional and Maximum Connections settings at their default values.  
10. Set the End of Job Timeout to the number of seconds to wait before processing a job without an  
End Of Job indicator.  
11. Leave the PDL Switching Enabled box at its default value.  
12. Click Apply to accept the changes, Undo to return the settings to their previous values, or Default  
All to enter printer defaults for all settings (recommended).  
Note: The settings are not applied until you restart the printer.  
13. Click the Status Tab.  
14. Click the Reboot Machine button and click OK to reboot the printer. The network controller takes  
approximately 5 minutes to reboot and network connectivity will be unavailable during this time.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
59  
   
Network Management  
To create a device description  
To create a device description from your terminal's command line.  
1. Select the F-4 key to prompt the CRTDEVPRT command. Enter the following parameters:  
Device Description: Xeroxprinter  
Device Class: *lan  
Device Type: 3812  
Device Model: 1  
2. Press Enter to continue, and enter the following parameters:  
Lan Attachment: *IP  
Port Number: 9100  
Online at IPL: *yes  
Font Identifier: 11  
Form Feed *autocut  
Note: For some versions of AS400, the default may match some of these parameters.  
3. Leave all other parameters at their defaults, press Enter, and enter the following parameters:  
Activation Timer: 170  
Inactivity Timer: *sec15  
Host Print Transform: *yes  
4. Press Enter to continue, and enter the following parameter:  
Manufacturer Type and Model: *hp5si  
5. Leave the remaining parameters set to their default values and press Enter to continue. Enter the  
following parameters:  
Remote Location: Enter the IP address of the printer.  
User defined options: *IBMSHRCNN  
System driver program: *IBMSNMPDRV  
6. Leave all other options set to the default values and press Enter. A message indicates that you  
created the printer Xeroxprinter.  
7. Set the printer on and start a print writer. Then place a spool file in the appropriate queue to test  
the printer.  
60  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Security  
Authentication  
Overview  
Procedure  
1. Set up authentication  
2. Set up authorization (LDAP authorization access)  
3. Set up access control (device access, service access)  
Users Types  
Authenticated Users: Are registered with the printer. When using a restricted service,  
authenticated users are prompted to type their user IDs on the authentication screen.  
Guest Users: Are permitted to use the printer using the Guest password set by the System  
Administrator.  
Authentication Types  
No Login Required: Users can access any service without restriction. This is the default type for the  
printer.  
Login to Local Accounts: This type uses the user information registered on the printer to manage  
authentication.  
Note: Setting Login Type to Login to Local Accounts automatically sets Accounting Type to Local  
Accounting. Local Accounting cannot be disabed while Login Type is set to Login to Local Accounts.  
Login to Remote Accounts: Network Access (authentication) uses the user information managed  
on a remote accounting service to manage authentication. Network Access allows a unified  
management of user information for multiple devices.  
Note: When registering user information on a remote authentication server, use up to 32 characters for  
a user ID and up to 128 characters for a password. For SMB, the password limit is 32 characters.  
Login Type set to Xerox Secure Access: This authentication type is used for third-party solutions  
that support Xerox Secure Access.  
Effects of Authentication on Job Flow Sheets and Folders  
When Login to Local Accounts is enabled, even if authentication is not enabled for the copy, fax, scan,  
or print services, authentication will be required for folder and job flow sheet operations.  
For full details on the effects of Authentication on Job Flow Sheets and Folders, refer to that topic in  
the printer’s User Guide.  
62  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Authentication  
Configuring Authentication  
Preparations:  
1. Ensure that the printer is on and connected to the network.  
2. Ensure that the TCP/IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the printer, and you can access  
CentreWare Internet Services. For more information see CentreWare Internet Services on page 23.  
3. Ensure that the Authentication Server to be used is functional on your network. Refer to your  
manufacturer’s documentation for instructions to complete this task.  
Configuring Local Machine Authentication  
When Login to Local Accounts is enabled, the System Administrator can define pass codes for  
authorized users (and guests, when the selection is available) to use to authenticate to the system and  
access restricted services.  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Select the Security folder, then Authentication Configuration. Enter your user name and  
password at the prompt (default: admin, 1111).  
5. Select Login to Local Accounts from the Login Type drop down list.  
6. Select the Print Stored File from Folder, or Folder to PC/Server Enabled check boxes to enable  
these services.  
7. Select the Non-account Print Enabled check box if you want to enable printing for people without  
accounts.  
8. Click Apply, then click Reboot Machine.  
9. Refresh your browser, click the Security folder, then Authentication Configuration.  
10. Click Next.  
11. To create or edit a user account, enter an Account Number in the Account Number box and click  
Edit. You can have up to 1000 user accounts.  
12. Set the following for the user.  
Feature Access: Copy Service, Fax Service, Scan Service, Print Service  
User Role: System Administrator, Account Administrator, User, Authorization Group  
Note: Authorization Group is a feature that has its own configuration options in CentreWare Internet  
Services.  
Note: Set each Feature Access as desired. Do not set a Feature Access to No Access, unless you wish to  
deny user access to that specific feature.  
13. Click Apply.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
63  
   
Security  
To configure Local Machine Authentication at the printer:  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Touch Authentication/Security Settings, then Authentication.  
6. Touch Login Type to change the Login Type, or touch Access Control, then Feature Access to  
change Feature Access.  
To view, create and edit user accounts at the printer:  
1. Touch Account in the Tools tab.  
2. Touch View User Accounts.  
Configuring Remote Authentication  
When Login to Remote Accounts is enabled, users of the printer will be asked to provide a user name  
and password to be validated by the designated authentication server. If this validation is successful,  
the printer and any restricted services will be available for individual use.  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Select the Security folder, then the Authentication Configuration. Enter your user name and  
password at the prompt (default: admin, 1111).  
5. Select Login to Remote Accounts from the Login Type drop down list.  
6. Select the Print Stored File from Folder, or Folder to PC/Server Enabled check boxes to enable  
these services.  
7. Select the Non-account Print Enabled check box if you wish to allow printing for a user without  
and account.  
8. If you want to allow guest access to the printer, select On next to Guest User. The default setting is  
Off. If you select On, enter a Guest user name and a passcode (4 – 12 alphanumeric characters).  
Retype the passcode.  
9. To have the printer cache remote account information, select Enabled next to Save remote  
accounts in this machine. Specify if you want to have the cached information deleted (click  
Delete Remote Accounts), and specify how often you want to delete cached information by  
selecting a deletion day, month and time.  
10. Click Apply, then Reboot Machine.  
11. Click Next.  
12. Click Configure for Authentication System.  
13. Select your system (Kerberos (Windows 2000), Kerberos (Solaris), LDAP, SMB, or Authentication  
Agent)from the Authentication System Settings drop down list and click Apply.  
14. Enter the Server Response Time-Out, and the Search Time-Out.  
64  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Authentication  
15. Select the Enabled check box next to Assign UPN (User Principal Name) if desired.  
16. Click Reboot Machine.  
Configure Remote Authentication for a Kerberos Server (Windows 2000 or Solaris)  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Security folder.  
5. Click the Remote Authentication Servers folder. Enter your user name and password at the  
prompt (default: admin, 1111).  
6. Click Authentication System and pick Kerberos (Windows 2000) or Kerberos (Solaris) from the  
drop down list. Click Apply, and click Reboot Machine.  
7. Navigate back to the Remote Authentication Servers folder and click Kerberos Server.  
8. Under Kerberso Server 1 (Default), enter the Primary Server Name / IP Address, Primary Port  
Number (default port for a Kerberos server is 88), and the Domain Name (Realm name).  
Note: Realm name for a Kerberos (Solaris) server should be in upper case. Example: YOURDOMAIN.NET  
9. Enter the IP Address of the Primary Server.  
10. The Secondary Server information is optional.  
11. Enter details for up to 4 alternate Domain Controllers and backups, if required.  
12. Click Apply, and supply the Administrator User name and password if prompted.  
Configure Remote Authentication for SMB  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Security folder.  
5. Click the Remote Authentication Servers folder. Enter your user name and password at the  
prompt (default: admin, 1111).  
6. Click Authentication System and pick SMB from the Authentication System Settings drop down  
list.  
7. Enter the Server Response Time-Out, and the Search Time-Out.  
8. Select the Enabled check box next to Assign UPN (User Principal Name) if desired.  
9. Click Apply, and click Reboot Machine.  
10. Click SMB Server.  
11. From the SMB Server Setup drop down menu, select your desired method. The selections include:  
By Domain Name, and By Domain Name and Server Address / IP Address.  
12. Enter the Domain name (up to 15 characters) in the Domain Name box, for every Domain  
Controller specified. This entry is required regardless of the selection made from the SMB Server  
Setup drop down menu.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
65  
Security  
Note: FQDN requires DNS and SMB Host Name requires WINS to be enabled on the printer.  
13. Enter the IP Address, FQDN, or SMB host name of the domain controller (up to 64 characters) in  
the SMB Server 1 Server Name / IP Address box (if By Domain Name and Server Address / IP  
Address was selected for SMB Server Setup).  
14. Enter the IP Address, FQDN, or SMB host name of up to 4 additional SMB servers, if applicable.  
Note: FQDN requires DNS and SMB Host Name requires WINS to be enabled on the printer.  
15. Click Apply.  
Configure Remote Authentication for LDAP  
1. Set up the LDAP Server. For information about setting up an LDAP server, see LDAP Server  
2. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
3. Click the Properties tab.  
4. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
5. Click the Security folder.  
6. Click the Remote Authentication Servers folder. Enter your user name and password at the  
prompt (default: admin, 1111).  
7. Click Authentication System and pick LDAP from the Authentication System Settings drop down  
list.  
8. Enter the Server Response Time-Out, and the Search Time-Out.  
9. Select the Enabled check box next to Assign UPN (User Principal Name) if desired.  
10. Click Apply, and click Reboot Machine.  
LDAP User Mappings  
You can click LDAP User Mappings to specify the attributes to search for within the LDAP database.  
For more information about LDAP user mappings, see LDAP User Mappings on page 108.  
LDAP Authentication  
To set LDAP for authentication, click LDAP Authentication. For Authentication Method, choose either  
Direct Authentication or Authentication of User Attributes. Direct Authentication uses the user name  
and password entered by the User for authentication with the LDAP server. Authentication of User  
Attributes allows you to specify the what is entered by the user (Attribute of Typed User Name) and  
what is used by the device (Attribute of the Login User Name) to authenticate the user. If Use Added  
Text String is enabled (default disabled), then what ever text is entered in the Text String Added to User  
Name box is added to the user input prior to authentication.  
Knowledge of LDAP Server authentication requirements and capabilities are required to properly  
configure these settings.  
66  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Authentication  
LDAP Group Access  
LDAP server user groups can be used to control access to the printer. For example, the LDAP server may  
contain a group of users called Admin. You can configure the Admin group on the printer so that the  
members of that group will have administrator access to the printer. When a user logs in at the printer  
with their network authentication account, the printer performs an LDAP look-up to determine if the  
user is a member of any groups. If the LDAP server confirms that the user is a member of the Admin  
group, the user will have administrator access.  
The following groups are available:  
Color Access Group  
System Administrator Access Group  
Account Administrator Authorization Group  
In one of the group access boxes, enter a name for the group. Repeat for other group access boxes.  
Note: Entries should be in base DN format (for instance, cn=Admin, ou=people, dc=xerox, dc=com).  
Configuring Network Authentication (by a Remote Accounting server)  
Network authentication uses the user information managed on a remote Accounting server to manage  
authentication (access) to available machine services.  
Enable Network Authentication  
To enable Network Authentication for use with this printer, at your networked computer, perform the  
following steps:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
4. Select the Security folder, then the Authentication Configuration.  
5. Select Login to Remote Accounts from the Login Type drop down list.  
6. Select the Print Stored File from Folder, or Folder to PC/Server Enabled check boxes to enable  
these services.  
7. Select the Non-account Print Enabled check box if you want to enable printing for people without  
accounts.  
8. Click Apply, then click Reboot Machine.  
9. Refresh your browser, click the Accounting folder, then Accounting Configuration.  
10. Select Network Accounting from the Accounting Type drop down list.  
11. From the Verify User Details drop down menu, select either Yes or No (keep logon records). The  
Yes selection will verify user information. When No (keep logon records) is selected, User ID and  
Account ID must be entered at the printer, but user information will not be checked. A logon record  
will be kept by the printer, however.  
12. Click Apply, then click Reboot Machine.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
67  
 
Security  
Note: Refresh your Web browser, then click User Details Setup to set the Store User Details setting. You  
can set either NVM or hard disk as the destination for saved authentication information. User Details  
Setup also allows you to configure the characteristics of the login prompt for User Authentication.  
Configure Communications Between the Accounting Server and the Printer  
Refer to the remote Accounting server manufacturer's documentation for the specific procedures to  
follow to configure communications between the server and the printer.  
The server will contact the printer based upon Accounting service parameters set up at the server, such  
as the printer's IP address and polling frequency.  
Required network communications and server settings will be stated by the server's manufacturer.  
Sample list of set up requirements for Xerox Secure Access Unified ID System's Accounting service  
Enable TCP/IP and HTTP on the printer.  
Set up a static or reserved DHCP IP address for the printer.  
Enable TCP/IP port 80 communications at the printer.  
Download the Controller Interface for Xerox from the Xerox Secure Access Unified ID System™ Web  
site.  
Install the Controller Interface for Xerox at the server.  
Verify that you have purchased a license for the Controller Interface for Xerox, as well as a license  
for each device communicating with the server.  
Register each printer at the server (using the printer's IP address for identification).  
Enable the Accounting Option in Computer Print Drivers  
Use the Windows Add Printer dialogs to add the printer's print driver to individual, networked  
computers. For more information see Print Driver Installation on page 13.  
In the print driver default setting dialogs, locate and then enable the Accounting option. This step  
assures that print jobs from individual computers will be recognized by the authentication system,  
rather than being unrecognized and deleted by the printer.  
For Windows operating systems, the default setting dialogs are accessed by right clicking on the  
printer's icon in the Printers window for Windows 2000, or the Printers and Faxes window for Windows  
XP. Select Properties from the displayed menu, then locate and enable the Accounting option.  
68  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Authentication  
Configuring Xerox Secure Access (Authentication)  
Xerox Secure Access enables customers to leverage Xerox Partner Solutions to provide user  
authentication with an optional card reader. Users can access the features available at the printer once  
they have been authenticated.  
Secure Access and Accounting  
Secure Access can be enabled with Network Accounting or the Xerox Standard Accounting feature for  
accounting purposes. To configure Xerox Secure Access with Network Accounting, refer to the  
Configuring Network authentication (by a remote Accounting server) topic in this section. To configure  
Xerox Secure Access with Xerox Standard Accounting, refer to the Optional information, in the  
Information Checklist below, then see Enabling Xerox Standard Accounting on page 171.  
Note: Secure Access cannot be enabled at the same time as Foreign printer Interface.  
Information Checklist  
1. Ensure that the printer is fully functional on the network. TCP/IP and HTTP protocols must be  
configured so that you can access CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Ensure that the Xerox Partner authentication solution (Secure Access Server, Controller, and Card  
Reader) is installed and communicating with the printer. Follow the installation instructions from  
the manufacturer of the authentication solution to correctly set the printers up.  
3. Ensure that SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) is configured on the printer. The Xerox Partner  
authentication solution communicates with the printer via HTTPS.  
4. (Optional) Ensure that Network Accounting is configured if you want the printer to send user  
account information to a Network Accounting server. Open your Web browser and enter the IP  
address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to open CentreWare Internet Services. Click  
the Properties tab, click the Security folder, click Authentication Configuration, and select Xerox  
Secure Access for Login Type, matched to Network Accounting for Accounting Type.  
5. For use with Xerox Standard Accounting, you select Xerox Secure Access for Login Type, then select  
Xerox Standard Accounting for Accounting Type. For instructions on setting up Xerox Standard  
Accounting, see Enabling Xerox Standard Accounting on page 171. For instructions on setting up  
your Network Accounting server, refer to the instructions that came with your accounting package,  
Note: When authentication is set to Xerox Secure Access, Xerox Standard Accounting is not available.  
You may also need another Authentication Server (running LDAP in an ADS environment, for  
example) to communicate with the Secure Access Server providing that server with user credential  
information. A second Authentication Server may be necessary for Web User Interface  
Authentication, if this feature is additionally desired.  
6. If you have an LDAP server on your network, you can configure LDAP on the printer, preferably from  
the Remote Authentication Server / Directory Service folder. For more information, see LDAP Server  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
69  
   
Security  
Configuring Xerox Secure Access with Remote Authentication  
To configure Xerox Secure Access with Remote Authentication:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
4. Click the Security folder, then Authentication Configuration.  
5. In the Authentication Configuration > Step 1 of 2 page:  
a. Select Xerox Secure Access from the Login Type drop down list.  
b. Select the Print Stored File from Folder, or Folder to PC/Server Enabled check boxes to enable  
these services.  
c. Select the Non-account Print: Enabled check box if you wish to allow printing for a user  
without and account.  
d. Select Apply, then reboot the printer after the prompt.  
e. Select Next to continue to the Authentication Configuration > Step 2 of 2 page.  
6. In the Authentication Configuration > Step 2 of 2 page, click Configure next to Authentication  
System.  
7. In the Authentication System page:  
a. Select Authentication Agent from the Authentication System Settings drop down list,  
b. Set the Server Response Time-out, and Search Time-out.  
c. Select the Assign UPN (User Principal Name): Enabled check box to assign a user principal  
name.  
d. Select Apply, then reboot the printer after the prompt.  
8. To set service access:  
a. Refresh your Web browser.  
b. Click the Security folder, then Authentication Configuration.  
c. In the Authentication Configuration > Step 1 of 2 page, click Next.  
d. Under Device Default State Configuration, click Configure next to Service Access.  
e. Select one of the following for each service you want to control:  
Unlocked: Allow unrestricted access.  
Locked (Show Icon): Require login for access. The service icon is visible to all users in the all  
services screen.  
Locked (Hide Icon): Require login for access. The service icon is hidden until an authorized user  
logs in.  
f. Click Apply and enter the Administrator User name and password when prompted (default of  
admin and 1111).  
g. Click OK.  
h. Click Reboot Machine when it displays on screen.  
70  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Authentication  
Enable Specific Xerox Secure Access Settings  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Select the Security folder.  
5. In the Security folder, select the Remote Authentication Servers folder.  
6. In the Remote Authentication Servers folder, select Xerox Secure Access Settings.  
7. In the Xerox Secure Access Settings area:  
a. Enter text in the Default Prompt and Default Title boxes to create the prompt and prompt  
title that will be displayed on the printer’s screen informing users how to authenticate  
themselves at the printer.  
b. If the Title and Prompt have been configured on the Secure Access Server, then that  
information will override the information entered here.  
c. Select the Enable box for Local Login to allow users to log in locally at the printer.  
d. Select the Enable box for Get Accounting Code to get user accounting data from a networked  
Accounting Server (if used).  
e. Click Apply.  
Using Secure Access  
1. Read the printer’s prompt to determine what needs to be done to be authenticated at the printer.  
Authentication methods include swiping a card, placing a proximity card near the reader, or  
entering a user ID or PIN (personal identification number).  
2. If the printer requests further information such as accounting details, enter this information at the  
printer.  
3. The printer will confirm successful authentication allowing access to previously locked system  
features.  
4. When finished, press the Login/Out button.  
Configure Color Copy Access for LDAP Group  
Refer to your LDAP server documentation for the full range of information that can be entered into this  
LDAP dialog to fully support both e-mail applications and authentication using your LDAP server.  
Creating Color Access Group within Active Directory  
This procedure describes how to create an Active Directory color access group to be used to restrict  
color copying and printing.  
Click Start, click Control Panel, double-click Administrative Tools, and then click Active Directory  
Users and Computers.  
1. In the Active Directory Users and Computers window, expand the domain folder.  
2. In the console tree, right-click the Users folder in which you want to add a new group.  
3. Click New, and then click Group.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
71  
Security  
4. Type the name of the new group. Use a name that you can easily associate with the role or service  
for which you are creating.  
5. To add users and/or groups to the newly created color access group, right-click the group and select  
Properties.  
6. Click the Members tab, then click the Add button to add members to the group.  
7. Click Finish.  
LDAP Group Access  
1. Click the Properties tab, click the Connectivity folder, click the Protocols folder, then click the LDAP  
folder.  
2. In the LDAP folder, click LDAP Group Access.  
3. On the LDAP Group Access page:  
4. In the Color Authorization area, on the Color Access Group line, type  
CN=Color,CN=Users,DC=crmttrinity,DC=lab  
5. Click Apply, then reboot the printer at the prompt.  
6. Continue with the next procedure to set Authentication Configuration.  
Authentication Configuration  
1. Click the Properties tab, then click the Security folder.  
2. Click Authentication Configuration.  
3. The Properties tab refreshes and the Authentication Configuration > Step 1 of 2 page appears.  
4. On the Authentication Configuration > Step 1 of 2 page, in the Authentication Configuration box:  
a. In the Login Type drop down list, click or verify Login to Remote Accounts.  
b. On the Folder to PC / Server line, click or verify the Enabled check box.  
c. On the Non-account Print line, ensure that the Enabled check box is not checked if you wish to  
enable people without accounts to continue to print.  
d. On the Guest User line, in the drop down list, click or verify Off.  
5. Click Apply, then reboot the printer following the prompt.  
6. Continue with the next procedure to set Authentication System.  
Authentication System  
1. Click the Properties tab, click the Security folder, then click the Remote Authentication Servers  
folder.  
2. In the Remote Authentication Servers folder, click Authentication System.  
3. On the Authentication System page, in the Authentication Type box:  
a. In the Authentication System Settings drop down list, click or verify LDAP.  
b. Click Apply, then reboot the printer at the prompt.  
Configure Color Copy Access Control at the Printer  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the printer control panel.  
2. Enter the default User Name (admin) and Password (1111) if prompted.  
3. Touch Enter.  
72  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Authentication  
4. Press the Machine Status button.  
5. Touch the Tools tab.  
6. Touch Authentication / Security Settings.  
7. In the Group column, touch Authentication.  
8. In the Features column, touch Access Control.  
9. On the Access Control screen, touch Feature Access.  
10. On the Feature Access screen:  
a. In the Items column, touch Color Copying.  
b. Touch the Change Settings button.  
11. On the Color Copy screen, touch Locked, then touch Save.  
12. Reboot the printer.  
13. Press the Services button, touch the Copy icon, then the Color button.  
14. The Login screen appears. The printer is configured for Color Copy Access for LDAP Group.  
To Enable Print Color Access Control  
This process will restrict a user from printing in color unless they are authorized to do so via the Active  
Directory group.  
1. Click Start, click Control Panel, double-click Printers and Faxes, then right-click the printer to be  
enabled. In the printer pop-up menu, click Properties.  
2. In the Properties dialog box, click the Options tab.  
3. On the Options tab, in the Options Settings area, click the Predefined Configurations folder.  
4. In the the Predefined Configurations area, click the Color Access Control field and click Enabled.  
5. Click the Color Access Group field and type or enter the color access group name.  
6. Click Apply, then click OK.  
Note: On the client side, if the user that installs the print driver is a member of the group given  
permission to print in color, then the Output Color option within the driver will be selectable between  
Color and Black and White. If the user does not have permission to print in color, then the Output Color  
option within the driver will list Black and White and is not selectable.  
Access Control  
After configuring the Authentication system, you must specify what services and features are to be  
controlled by authentication and will require the user login.  
Device Access: Use for restricting access to the Services Pathway, Job Status Pathway, or Machine  
Status pathway. Device Access settings are:  
Unlocked: Allow unrestricted access  
Locked: Require login for access.  
Service Access: Use for restricting access to each individual service (copy, e-mail, etc). Services  
Access settings are:  
Unlocked: Allow unrestricted access.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
73  
   
Security  
Locked (Show Icon): Require login for access. The service icon is visible to all users in the all  
services screen  
Locked (Hide Icon): Require login for access. The service icon is hidden until an authorized user  
logs in.  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Security folder  
5. Click Authentication Configuration.  
6. In the Authentication Configuration box, select the Next button.  
7. In the Device Default State Configuration section, select the Configure button next to Device  
Access and/or Service Access, and Apply and supply the Administrator User name and password if  
prompted.  
802.1x  
The printer supports 802.1x authentication based on the Extensible Application Protocol (EAP). 802.1x  
can be enabled for devices connected through both wired and wireless Ethernet networks. As described  
here, the 802.1x configuration is used to authenticate the printer, rather than individual users. After  
the printer has been authenticated, it will be accessible to users on the network.  
The administrator can configure the printer to use one EAP type. EAP types currently supported on the  
printer are:  
EAP-MD5  
PEAP/EAP-MS-CHAPv2  
EAP-MS-CHAPv2  
Information Checklist  
Create a user name and password on your authentication server which will be used to authenticate the  
Xerox device.  
Ensure your 802.1x authentication server and authentication switch are available on the network.  
Configure 802.1x with CentreWare Internet Services  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Security folder.  
5. Click IEEE 802.1x.  
6. Select the Enabled check box next to Enable IEE 802.1x.  
74  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Authentication  
7. Select the required Authentication Method.  
8. Enter the User Name and Password required by your authentication switch and server.  
9. Click Apply, then Reboot Machine.  
Encryption Service Overview  
You may have to purchase the Security Kit option to enable encryption with your printer. If you cannot  
generate a self-signed certificate, or enable SSL/TLS Communication, as stated under Configuration of  
HTTP Communication Encryption, in this section, contact your Xerox Representative to purchase the  
option.  
The communication data between the printer and computers on a network can be encrypted.  
Encryption for the printer is set up using CentreWare Internet Services. Note that the quickest and  
easiest, although not the most trusted, method to use to set up initial HTTP communication encryption  
is the generation of a self-signed certificate. Click Printer Digital Certificate Management in the  
Security folder on the Properties page of CentreWare Internet Services. Use this to manage all the  
digital certificates, of various types, stored on the printer.  
Types of Encryption Services Available  
Encryption of HTTP Communications from a Client to the Printer (Server Certificate)  
The SOAP port, Internet service (HTTP) port, IPP port, and WebDAV port use the HTTP server of the  
printer.  
The SSL/TLS suite of protocols is used in the encryption of HTTP communications from a client to the  
printer. A user of a client computer accesses the printer’s HTTP server by typing https://, followed by  
the IP address of the printer, into the Address box of a Web browser application. The printer then offers  
the client a Digital Certificate, which the client accepts (after reviewing the validity of same). Upon  
acceptance of the Digital Certificate, a Public Key exchange takes place, encryption algorithms are  
agreed upon between the two parties, and the client uses the server’s Public Key to communicate with  
the server using digitally signed and encrypted data.  
Digital certificates imported from a Certificate Authority, or self-signed certificates created with  
CentreWare Internet Services, can be used as SSL/TLS certificates on the printer’s HTTP server.  
Encryption of HTTP Communications from the Printer to a Remote Server (Client Certificate)  
The SSL/TLS suite of protocols is used to encrypt HTTP communications with a remote server.  
No client certificate is typically required for this activity. However, if a remote server is set to require an  
SSL client certificate, an SSL/TLS client certificate must be registered on the printer.  
Digital certificates imported from a Certificate Authority can be used as SSL/TLS certificates on the  
printer’s HTTP server.  
Note: When Remote Server Certificate Validation is enabled, under SSL/TLS Settings in CentreWare  
Internet Services, the root certificate of the remote server must be registered to the printer (imported  
with CentreWare Internet Services) to verify the Digital certificate of same.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
75  
 
Security  
E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature  
S/MIME certificates, imported from a Certificate Authority (in PKCS7 format), can be used on the  
printer’s for E-mail Encryption.  
Note: To import S/MIME certificates, use the Machine Digital Certificate Management in the Security  
folder on the Properties tab of CentreWare Internet Services.  
Encryption/Digital Signature of Scanned Files (PDF/XPS Documents)  
While no digital signatures are required to encrypt PDF and XPS documents, these documents can be  
signed with imported PKCS12 Digital signatures.  
When adding digital signatures to PDF or XPS documents, scan file certificates imported to the printer  
from a Certificate Authority, are typically used.  
To import PKCS12 scan file certificates, use the Machine Digital Certificate Management in the  
Security folder on the Properties Page of CentreWare Internet Services.  
IP Sec (typically used to encrypt FTP) can be enabled from the Security file folder on the Properties tab  
of CentreWare Internet Services.  
802.1x can be enabled for devices connected through both wired and wireless Ethernet networks. It is  
used to authenticate the printer on the 802.1x network, rather than individual users. 802.1x can be  
enabled from the Security file folder on the Properties tab of CentreWare Internet Services.  
Configuration of HTTPS (SSL/TLS) Communication Encryption  
Two methods are available depending on the type of certificate.  
Create a self-signed certificate on the printer with CentreWare Internet Services, and enable  
HTTPS. This method is used primarily for Server certificates.  
Enable HTTPS, and import a signed certificate from a Certificate Authority, using the Machine  
Digital Certificate Management in the Security folder on the Properties Page of CentreWare  
Internet Services.  
To see this, at least one certificate must have been created and stored on the printer.This is one of  
the purposes for creating a self-signed certificate.  
Before enabling any encryption or digital signing feature, or importing any digital certificates, check  
the status of the certificate and create a new certificate if there is not one already created:  
1. In CentreWare Internet Services, click the Properties tab, then click the Security folder.  
2. Click Machine Digital Certificate Management.  
3. Click Create New Certificate.  
4. Select Self-Signed Certificate and click Continue.  
5. Select Public Key Size (512 Bits or 1024 Bits).  
6. Set Issuer (default device host name)  
7. Apply.  
76  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Authentication  
After clicking Machine Digital Certificate Management in the Security folder, the current status is  
displayed. If the status shows "A Self-Signed Certificate is established on this machine", then you do  
not need to create new certificate.  
Note: You must enable HTTP – SSL/TLS Communication in order to Upload Signed Certificates and to  
see Certificate Management , and Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings in the Security folder.  
Configuring Certificates with CentreWare Internet Services  
Two methods are available to configure certificates with CentreWare Internet Services: creating a self-  
signed certificate (for SSL server), and importing a signed certificate from a Certificate Authority.  
This section describes how to create a self-signed certificate (for SSL server).  
Note: When importing a certificate, if the same certificate has been already registered in Local Device  
or Others, the certificate cannot be imported. Delete the registered certificate before importing.  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the printer’s IP address into the Address box of your Web  
browser, and press the Enter key.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Security folder.  
4. Click Machine Digital Certificate Management.  
5. When prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
6. Generate a certificate.  
a. Click the Create Self-Signed Certificate button.  
b. Set the size of the Public Key as necessary.  
c. Set Issuer as necessary.  
7. Click the Apply button.  
8. Refresh the Web browser.  
9. Click the Security folder.  
10. Click SSL/TLS Settings.  
11. Select the Enable check box for SSL / TLS Server Communication.  
12. Check the SSL / TLS Port Number.  
Note: The default port is 443.  
13. Click Apply and click Reboot Machine. The printer will be unavailable for a short period of time.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
77  
Security  
Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature  
Configuration on the Printer  
Import an S/MIME certificate from a Certificate Authority (in PKCS7 format), then configure the  
certificate on the printer using CentreWare Internet Services.  
To send encrypted e-mail from the machine, you will need the public key of the recipient to be loaded  
on the device.  
Note: The e-mail address of the machine must match the e-mail address specified in the certificate  
must match, otherwise S/MIME will be disabled.  
Note: The e-mail address of the device must be set before you are able to select the S/MIME device  
certificate to use.  
Configuration on a Computer  
To send encrypted e-mail to the printer, you will need a copy of the printer’s S/MIME certificate on your  
computer to allow you to encrypt E-mail being sent to the printer. The S/MIME certificate represents  
the Public Key of the printer, allowing encryption or digital signing to take place.  
To acquire the Public Key, you must use the Export feature or send a digitally signed E-mail.  
Configuring S/MIME certificates with CentreWare Internet Services  
To configure S/MIME certificates with CentreWare Internet Services, first enable HTTP  
communications (as stated under Configuration of HTTP Communication Encryption in this section).  
Next, import an S/MIME certificate from a Certificate Authority (in PKCS7 format). Finally, enable  
S/MIME.  
First import an S.MIME certificate:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the printer's IP address, beginning with https, into the Address  
box of your Web browser, and press Enter.  
Example:  
https://192.168.1.1/  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Security folder.  
4. Click Machine Digital Certificate Management.  
5. When prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
78  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Authentication  
6. Click Upload Signed Certificate.  
Note: When importing a certificate, if the same certificate has been already registered in Local printer  
or Others, the certificate cannot be imported. Delete the existing certificate before importing the new  
one.  
a. Enter the Password. (if required)  
b. Re-enter the Password (if required).  
c. Enter a file name for the file you want to import, or select the file to be imported by clicking the  
Browse button.  
7. Click the Import button.  
8. Refresh the Web browser.  
9. Click the Security folder.  
Configure the certificate:  
10. Click Certificates Management.  
11. Select Local printer for Category, S/MIME for Certificate Purpose, and then click the Display the  
List button.  
12. Place a check mark in the box in front of the Certificate you wish to view details for.  
13. Click the Certificate Details button.  
14. Click the Use this certificate button.  
15. Click Reboot Machine. The printer will be unavaillable for a short period of time.  
Configure S/MIME settings:  
16. Refresh the Web browser.  
17. Click the Security folder.  
18. Click SSL/TLS Settings.  
19. Select the Enable check box for S/MIME Communication.  
20. Apply the settings.  
a. Click Apply.  
b. The right frame on the Web browser will change to the printer reboot display.  
c. Click Reboot Machine. The printer will be unavailable for a short period of time.  
Configure the settings for S/MIME.  
21. Refresh the Web browser.  
22. Click the Security folder.  
23. Click S/MIME Settings and set the following items.  
Message Digest Algorithm: Select a message digest algorithm from SHA1 or MD5.  
Contents Encryption Method: Select a contents encryption method from 3DES, RC2-40, RC2-  
64, or RC2-128.  
Certificate Auto Store: Click the check box to automatically save an S/MIME certificate  
attached to an e-mail received from an address registered in your address book.  
Receive Untrusted E-mail: Decide whether or not you wish to receive untrusted E-mail.  
Receive Untrusted iFAX: Decide whether or not you wish to receive untrusted iFAXes.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
79  
Security  
Digital Signature – Outgoing E-mail: Decide whether or not to add a digital signature to  
outgoing E-mail, and the method to use if a signature is desired. Select Always Add Signature,  
Do not add Signature, or Select During Send.  
Digital Signature – Outgoing iFAX: Decide whether or not to add a digital signature to  
outgoing iFAXes, and the method to use if a signature is desired.  
Note: The Fax option is required.  
24. Click Apply.  
Configuration on a Computer  
The following describes the configuration for a remote, networked computer.  
Sending Scanned Data by S/MIME Encrypted E-mail from the Printer to a Computer  
An S/MIME certificate must be imported, configured, and stored on the printer as stated in this section  
under Configuring S/MIME certificates with CentreWare Internet Services.  
When importing the S/MIME certificate, make sure that a root certificate is included for use with the  
Supported E-mail applications shown below.  
Receiving E-mail with S/MIME Digital Signature from the Printer  
No settings are required on a recipient computer.  
Sending S/MIME Encrypted E-mail by E-mail Printing from a Computer to the Printer  
It is necessary to register the S/MIME certificate of the printer on the computer.  
There are two methods to set an S/MIME certificate of the printer on the computer:  
Sending e-mail with S/MIME digital signature from the printer to the computer  
To send e-mail with an S/MIME digital signature from the printer, configure to attach the digital  
signature when sending E-mail in the Digital Signature – Outgoing E-mail settings.  
Exporting an S/MIME certificate to the computer using CentreWare Internet Services and  
registering the exported S/MIME certificate in the certificate storage location of the E-mail  
application.  
Note that the exporting of certificates is accomplished using the Trusted Certificates Management  
under Security folder on the Properties page of CentreWare Internet Services. For information on  
how to register a certificate in an E-mail application, refer to the manuals provided with the E-mail  
application.  
Sending E-mail with S/MIME digital signature from a computer to the printer  
It is necessary to register a personal certificate of a sender's E-mail address, an intermediate certificate  
authority certificate of the personal certificate, and a root certificate on the printer.  
80  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Authentication  
Supported E-mail applications  
E-mail applications that can send and receive E-mail to and from the printer are:  
Outlook 2000/2002/2003  
Outlook Express 6  
Netscape 7.x  
Configuration of Scan File Signatures (PDF/XPS Documents)  
Configuration at the Printer  
Import a certificate from a Certificate Authority (in PKCS12 format), then configure the certificate on  
the printer using CentreWare Internet Services.  
Configuration on a Computer  
Prepare for verification of the PDF or XPS signature.  
Configuring Scan File certificates with CentreWare Internet Services  
To configure certificates with CentreWare Internet Services, first enable HTTP communications (as  
stated under Configuration of HTTP Communication Encryption in this section). Next, import a  
certificate from a Certificate Authority (in PKCS12 format). Finally, set the certificate as a scan file  
certificate.  
1. Start a Web browser.  
2. Enter the printer's IP address, beginning with https, into the Address box of your Web browser, and  
press Enter.  
Example:  
https://192.168.1.1/  
3. Click the Properties tab.  
4. Click the Security folder.  
5. Click Machine Digital Certificate Management.  
6. Click Upload Signed Certificate.  
Note: When importing a certificate, if the same certificate has been already registered in Local printer  
or Others, the certificate cannot be imported. Delete the existing certificate before importing the new  
one.  
a. Enter the Password.  
b. Re-enter the Password.  
c. Enter a file name for the file you want to import, or select the file to be imported by clicking the  
Browse button.  
d. Click the Import button. When a screen to enter the user name and password appears, enter  
the System Administrator user ID and password into User Name and Password, and then click  
OK.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
81  
 
Security  
Note: The default user ID is admin and the default password is 1111.  
7. Refresh the Web browser.  
8. Click the Security folder.  
9. Configure the certificate.  
a. Click Trusted Digital Certificate Management.  
b. Select Local printer for Category, Scan File for Certificate Purpose, and then click the Display  
the List button.  
c. Place a check mark in the box in front of the certificate you wish to view details for.  
d. Click the Certificate Details button.  
e. Click the Use this certificate button.  
f. Click Reboot. The printer will reboot and the setting values will be reflected.  
10. Configure the settings for PDF/XPS Signatures.  
a. Refresh the Web browser.  
b. Click the Security folder.  
c. Click PDF/XPS Security Settings and then set the following items.  
PDF Signature: Select the setting for PDF Signature from Do not add signature, Always add  
visible signature, Always add invisible signature, or Select during send.  
XPS Signature: Select the setting for XPS Signature from Do not add signature, Always add  
visible signature, Always add invisible signature, or Select during send.  
d. Click the Apply button.  
Configuration on a Computer  
Confirm that the digital certificate being used by the printer to encrypt PDF and XPS files has been  
imported and is registered on the recipient’s computer. This will assure the ability to conduct two way  
digital signing of files, should this capability be desired or needed.  
IP Sec  
IP Sec (IP Security) is comprised of the IP Authentication Header and IP Encapsulating Security  
Payload protocols, that secure IP communications at the network layer of the protocol stack, using  
both authentication and data encryption techniques. The ability to send IP Sec encrypted data to the  
printer is provided by the use of a public cryptographic key, following a network negotiating session  
between the initiator (client computer) and the responder (printer or server). To send encrypted data to  
the printer, the computer and the printer have to establish a Security Association with each other by  
verifying a matching password (shared secret) to each other. If this authentication is successful, a  
session public key will be built and used to send IP Sec encrypted data over the TCP/IP network to the  
printer.  
Providing additional security during the Public Key negotiating process, Digital Certificates can  
alternatively be used in place of the Shared Secret, to encrypt the Public Key information being  
exchanged between communicating parties. The Digital Certificate resides on the printer (managed as  
stated in this Encryption section in the Configuring Scan File certificates topic) and must also have  
been imported and stored on the computer that is encrypting data being sent to the printer.  
82  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Authentication  
Certificates add digital signatures (individualized checksums verifying data integrity) to datagrams  
during the public key negotiating process, greatly assisting in securing that data from network sniffers.  
Enabling IP Sec  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Security folder.  
5. Select IP Sec in the directory tree.  
6. Enable the Protocol by placing a checkmark in the Enabled box.  
7. Select Pre-Shared Key to use the Shared Secret (between this device and remote computers also  
possessing the secret). Note that if you select Digital Signature, the Shared Secret boxes will be  
grayed out and you will have to supply a certificate stored on this device to the remote computer  
that wishes to send IP Sec encrypted data to this device.  
8. Enter the Shared Secret (a password) in the Shared Secret and Verify Shared Secret boxes.  
9. Select Enabled (default setting) for the Communicate with Non-IP Sec Device setting, so that  
computers not set up for encryption can still communicate with this device.  
10. Click Apply when done and supply the Administrator User Name and Password, if prompted.  
Note: The default user ID is admin and the default password is 1111.  
FIPS 140-2  
To enable FIPS 140-2 encryption:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
4. Click the Security folder and click FIPS140 Validation Mode.  
5. Click the Enabled check box and click Apply.  
Note: FIPS 140-2 encryption does not apply to the following services and protocols: SMB, NetWare,  
SNMP v3, PDF Direct Print Service.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
83  
 
Security  
Scheduled Image Overwrite  
A TCP/IP network-connected device can be set to overwrite image data on a scheduled basis.  
The Image Overwrite will delete all image data from the hard disk.  
To enable a scheduled image overwrite, perform the following steps:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Security folder.  
4. Click Scheduled Image Overwrite.  
5. Click the Scheduled Image Overwrite Enabled check box.  
6. Configure the Frequency, Day, Week, Hour, and Minute settings.  
Note: The printer will be taken off-line each day at the specified time to perform the overwrite.  
7. Click Apply.  
8. Click OK to confirm.  
9. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
84  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Secure Watermark  
Secure Watermark  
This procedure enables the System Administrator to set parameters for the inclusion of a Secure  
Watermark as the background for any documents that are copied or printed on this, or another  
identical model machine.  
Secure Watermark works with copy job, client print, folder print, media print, incoming fax prints and  
reports.  
You must purchase the Security option to enable this feature. Contact your Xerox representative to  
purchase the option.  
Secure Watermark configuration items include:  
Default Watermark Effect  
Default Watermark  
Font Size  
Background Pattern  
Date Format  
Font Color  
Density  
Watermark / Background Contrast  
Force Watermark – Copy Job  
Force Watermark – Client Print  
Force Watermark – Print Stored File  
Force Watermark – Media Print  
Custom Watermark 1  
Custom Watermark 2  
Custom Watermark 3  
Configuring Secure Watermark  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Touch System Settings.  
6. Touch Common Service Settings.  
7. Touch Watermark. If not visible, use the scrolling arrow in the Features column.  
8. On the Watermark screen, in the Items column, touch the item to be configured, then touch  
Change Settings. The screen for the item will open.  
9. On the selected item screen, make your change and touch Save.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
85  
   
Security  
10. Touch Close to return to the Tools tab.  
11. Press the Log In/Out button.  
12. Select Log Out.  
13. Place a copy in the document feeder of the printer and press the Start button.  
14. Place the copy just made into the document feeder of the same, or an identical model, machine,  
and attempt to make a copy. Note that copying of this document is prohibited.  
86  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Secure Print  
Secure Print  
Supported by the printer’s print driver, or CentreWare Internet Services Print tab, this feature directs  
the printing of confidential documents, or documents which should not be seen by third parties, to a  
User Account on the printer. The user can then access his or her Account, with a numeric password, at  
the printer, and privately print out the stored documents.  
Using Secure Print from the Print Driver  
To use the Secure Print feature from the print driver, installed on a networked computer, perform the  
following steps.  
1. Open a document to print from the computer.  
2. Select Print in your software application, select the Printer, then select Properties.  
3. On the Paper / Output tab, select Secure Print as your Job Type.  
4. Enter Passcode (1-12 digits). Enter the Passcode again in the Confirm Passcode field.  
5. Click Setup… and enter a User ID (such as 001) and a numeric password.  
6. Click OK on successive driver screens until the job prints.  
7. Go to the printer and press the Job Status button.  
8. Press the Secure Print Jobs & More tab.  
9. Press Secure Print.  
10. Highlight your user ID and press Job List.  
11. Enter Passcode and select Confirm.  
12. Select a job or select Select All.  
13. Click Print.  
14. Press Close several times, when done, to return to the Job Status screen.  
15. Press the Services button on the control panel to return to the Services screen.  
Using Secure Print from CentreWare Internet Services  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Print tab.  
3. Scroll down to the bottom of the page to see the Secure Print radio button.  
4. Click the Secure Print radio button to enable it.  
5. Enter a User ID (such as 001).  
6. Enter your desired, numeric passcode in the two boxes provided.  
7. Use the Browse… button to locate your PRINT READY file.  
8. Click Submit Job. Then go to the printer and press the Job Status button.  
9. Press the Secure Print Jobs & More tab.  
10. Press Secure Print.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
87  
       
Security  
11. Highlight your user ID and press Job List.  
12. Enter Passcode and select Confirm.  
13. Select a job or select Select All.  
14. Click Print.  
15. Press Close several times, when done, to return to the Job Status screen.  
16. Press the Services button on the control panel to return to the Services screen.  
88  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Xerox Common Access Card  
Xerox Common Access Card  
Xerox Common Access Card is an optional solution which provides an advanced level of security to  
sensitive information. By using this solution, you can restrict access to the walk-up features of the  
printer. This ensures that only authorized users are able to copy, scan, E-mail, and fax information.  
The key benefit of this solution is its two-factor identification requirement. Users must insert their  
access card and enter a unique Personal Identification Number (PIN) at the device. This provides  
added security in the event that a card is lost or stolen.  
The Xerox Common Access Enablement kit integrates with Xerox multifunction printers and existing  
common access and personal identity verification cards and readers.  
Supported Card Readers  
The customer is responsible for providing a card reader for each Printer. The following card readers are  
compatible with the solution:  
Gemplus GemPC Twin  
Gemplus GemPC USB SL  
SCM Micro SCR3310  
Panasonic ZU9PS  
Omnikey Cardman 3021USB  
Omnikey Cardman 3121USB  
Note: Other CCID compliant readers may function with the solution, but have not been validated.  
Supported Card Types  
The customer is also responsible for purchasing and configuring the access cards. The following card  
types are recommended:  
Axalto Pegasus 64K / V2  
Axalto Cyberflex 32K / V1  
Axalto Cyberflex 64K \ V2  
Gemplus GemXpresso 64K / V2  
Oberthur 72K \ V2  
Oberthur Cosmopoll 32K / V1  
Oberthur D1 72K / V2 (contact-less and PIV)  
Note: Other card types may function with the solution, but have not been validated.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
89  
     
Security  
Preparation  
The following items and information are required before installation  
Compatible Card Reader: See Supported Card Readers on page 89.  
Compatible Access Card: See Supported Card Types on page 89.  
Common Access Card Enablement Kit  
TCP/IP enabled on the Printer  
DNS Host name or static IP address assigned  
Network Settings to be checked to ensure network is fully functional  
Domain Controller (DC) information:  
Domain Controller authentication environment  
IP address or Host Name  
Domain information  
Domain Controller Root and Intermediate certificates  
Check that all certificates are in 64 bit X.509 format  
Determine if the DC is registered with the OCSP at this site  
OCSP Server information:  
OCSP Server URL  
OCSP Root and Intermediate Certificates  
Check that all certificates are in 64 bit X.509 format  
Proxy Server configuration details  
To set up the Domain Controller (DC) validation, you will need to determine if your site validates the  
DC against the OCSP server. Many sites use OCSP to validate individuals, but do not register the DC  
with it. If you set up the Printer to validate the DC and it isn’t registered, the procedure will fail.  
The retrieved DC certificate is compared to the one stored at installation. This provides a high level of  
security as it prevents rogue DCs masquerading as the real DC.  
Note: Certificates are often obtained from the Information Technology professionals that support your  
organization.  
Server Requirements  
Ensure your network infrastructure supports Common Access Card or Personal Identification  
Verification (PIV).  
Names or IP addresses of all servers and domains are required during setup.  
Electrical Requirements  
The USB port on the back of the printer’s network controller provides the power required for any of the  
supported card readers.  
90  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Xerox Common Access Card  
Installing the Common Access Card Software  
Ensure that you have downloaded the Xerox WorkCentre software before performing these  
instructions.  
If you are using a Proxy Server to reach external addresses, turn the proxy off at your browser before  
beginning the software install process. You can also send the printer to the list of exceptions that do  
not use the Proxy Server.  
Follow the instructions below to install the Xerox WorkCentre software.  
Enable software upgrades:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
4. Click the Services folder.  
5. Select Machine Software, then Upgrades.  
6. Select the Enabled check box, and then select Apply.  
Locate the Software:  
7. Select Properties then Services.  
8. Select Machine Software then Manual Upgrade.  
9. Browse to the location of the software which was downloaded from the Xerox Web site and select  
the file.  
10. The path to the software file displays in the browse window.  
Install the software on the Printer:  
11. Select Install Software. The software file will begin uploading, and a message will be displayed  
when finished.  
The status of the upgrade is shown at the printer and the CentreWare Internet Services interface is no  
longer accessible.  
Check the upgrade status:  
12. Check the upgrade status at the printer, by pressing the Machine Status button on the control  
panel and verifying the updated System Software level.  
13. Once the software has been upgraded, the printer reboots automatically.  
Note: The system may reboot more than once, depending on the software level of the machine before  
the upgrade.  
14. Print out a Configuration Report to verify the new software level.  
15. The Common Access Card settings are now ready for configuring, using the CentreWare Internet  
Services interface.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
91  
 
Security  
Enabling and Configuring the Common Access Card Feature  
Enabling the Common Access Card Software Option  
Once the correct version of the software has been successfully loaded and verified, the Common  
Access Card software feature needs to be enabled on the printer.  
This procedure should be performed by your System Administrator, or someone with System Admin  
access rights.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Using the keyboard screen, enter the following PIN number into the System Administrator’s Login  
ID field: *6421145151.  
Note: To de-activate the PIN number, simply enter the following PIN number into the System  
Administrator’s Login ID field: *6421145150.  
3. Touch Next.  
4. Touch Logout. The printer will reboot.  
5. Login as the System Administrator and select the Machine Status button.  
6. Locate the Tools tab and select the System Settings followed by the Common Settings option,  
and then the Maintenance option.  
7. Next, select the Software Option button and select the Keyboard button to enter the supplied  
number.  
8. When finished, press the Save button, followed by the Reboot button for changes to take effect.  
Configuring the Date and Time to update automatically using Network Time  
Protocol (NTP)  
Ensure that the NTP Enable box is enabled on the printer. In order to do so, the System Administrator  
must log in to the printer.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
Note: In order to login as the System Administrator, you must select System Administrator from the  
pull down menu. Verify that this selection is being made. If you see the option for Registered User, then  
you will not be able to login as the System Administrator.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Next, select the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. On the right side of the display, under Features, select the Machine Clock/Timers option.  
6. Select the option for NTP Time Synchronization.  
7. Select the Change Settings option and select the On option.  
8. Select the Save option.  
9. Select the Time Server Address option.  
92  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Xerox Common Access Card  
10. Select the Change Settings option and enter the IP address of the server in which the network  
time will be synched with.  
11. Press the Save button.  
12. Press the Log In/Out button.  
13. Touch Logout. The printer will automatically reboot.  
Configure Authentication settings for CAC  
Note: These installation steps can also be performed at the printer. This is be done by logging in as the  
System Administrator, selecting the Machine Status button, then proceeding to the Tools tab and  
navigating to the Authentication/Security Settings button. From the Authentication/Security  
Settings button, continue to navigate to Authentication, followed by Login Type. Then navigate back  
to the Tools menu option for System Settings. Select Common Service Settings and navigate to  
Connectivity & Network Setup. Select Remote Authentication Server Settings, followed by  
Authentication Systems. Then select Kerberos (Windows 2000). Enter the network settings for the  
Authentication server by selecting Kerberos Server Settings.  
To configure the Authentication settings from your computer, you must use CentreWare Internet  
Services.  
Note: Verify that your Common Access Card reader is plugged in and operational.  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Security folder.  
5. Select the option for Authentication Configuration, and select Login to Remote Accounts from  
the pull down menu. After selected, press the Apply button. The system will automatically reboot.  
6. While still in the Security folder, scroll down and click the Remote Authentication  
Servers/Authentication System Settings folder.  
7. Locate and select the Authentication System folder.  
8. Press the pull down arrow and select the option for Kerberos (Windows 2000) and select Apply.  
9. Enter the Kerberos server network address and realm name for all available Kerberos servers.  
10. When entering the domain names, make sure to use ALL CAPS in the field.  
Configuring the CAC Device Access Control  
Note: This installation process can also be performed at the printer. This can be done by logging in as  
the System Administrator, selecting the Machine Status button, then proceeding to the Tools tab and  
navigating to the Authentication /Security Settings button. From the Authentication/Security  
Settings button, continue to navigate to Authentication, followed by Access Control.  
1. Continuing from the previous setup, select Authentication Configuration in the Security folder.  
2. Select either the Device Access configure button, or the Service Access configuration button.  
3. If you select the Device Access configure button, the following window will appear.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
93  
Security  
Note: If you wish to “Lock” individual device pathways, you may choose to lock any combination of All  
Services, Job Status Pathway, or Machine Status Pathway. After you have made your selection, or  
selections, press the Apply button for your selections to be saved.  
Use this option to Lock individual Services as well as configure your desired combination of services.  
Note: When the Common Access Card is enabled, the full Copy Service feature is locked by default.  
Configure CAC Settings at the Printer  
Note: Be sure that the Common Access Card Reading device has been installed prior to the following  
procedure steps.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Select the Authentication/Security Settings button, followed by the Authentication button.  
4. Select the User Details Setup button, and set the Use of Smartcard option to Enabled.  
Note: If you set this value to Enable PKI Only, the smartcard is used only for signing and/or encrypting  
the scan document, not for authentication.  
5. Set the SmartCard Link Mode to No Passcode required.  
6. Set the SmartCard Certificate Verification Mode to Disabled.  
Note: By setting the option to Disabled, you are only verifying the PIN on the card. By selecting the  
option for Enabled, you are verifying both the PIN and the Certificate.  
Setting up Certificates for Authentication  
The following procedure is performed using the CentreWare Internet Services. Access the Printer by  
typing in the device’s’ IP address in your Web browser’s address field.  
Note: Certificates can only be registered on the device when SSL is enabled on the device. This can be  
accomplished by first creating a self-signed certificate on the device and then enabling SSL. This  
procedure must be performed by someone with System Administrator rights.  
1. At your computer, Login to the CentreWare Internet Services as the System Administrator.  
2. Select the Properties tab, and select the Security folder and navigate down until you locate the  
Machine Digital Certificate Management option.  
3. Select the Create New Self Signed Certificate option.  
4. Select Apply.  
5. Next, while still under the Security folder, scroll down the list and locate the option for SSL / TLS  
Settings.  
6. The following window will be displayed. Under the HTTP – SSL / TSL Communication check box,  
make the selection for Enabled, and then select Apply.  
7. The Printer will need to be rebooted before the changes can take effect. Select the Reboot  
Machine option.  
94  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Xerox Common Access Card  
Note: After the Printer has returned online, the System Administrator can load the required Root  
Certificate Authority certificates for the Domain Controllers and the OCSP Server.  
8. At your computer, within the option for Machine Digital Certificate Management locate and  
select the option for Upload Signed Certificate. This option should now be available to you based  
on the machine reboot.  
Uploading Signed Certificates  
After selecting the Upload Signed Certificate option, the System Administrator will perform the  
following procedures.  
1. Upon selecting the Upload Signed Certificate button, the following window will display. The  
System Administrator can browse to the directory location on the PC where the certificates will be  
stored.  
2. After the certificate has been saved to the PC, the System Administrator can manage certificates  
that are loaded onto the Printer, as well as the functions they are to be used for.  
Note: In order to review all the certificates, select the option for Other to view the available  
certificates.  
3. Select the desired options and select the Display the list button.  
4. When the certificates are listed, you can select one by checking the box and then select Certificate  
Details to review.  
5. The Certificate Details window will allow the System Administrator to Export this certificate, Delete,  
or Use this certificate.  
Checking Proxy Server details  
If required by your network environment, ensure the Proxy Server details have been configured.  
1. At your computer, select the Properties tab in CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. From the displayed window, select the option for Connectivity.  
3. Next, select the option for Proxy Server.  
4. The Proxy Server option needs to be Enabled and the server address needs to be configured.  
5. Select the option for Apply.  
Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings  
The System Administrator can use the functionality found in the Certificate Revocation Retrieval  
Settings option to configure the desired Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) or Certificate  
Revocation List (CRL).  
1. Under the Security folder, select the option for Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings.  
2. Under the Level of Certificate Verification section, select the Level of Certificate Verification  
setting for the Common Access Card to High.  
The following Level of Certificate Validation descriptions are listed below;  
Low: The revocation status of certificates is not checked.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
95  
Security  
Medium: The revocation status of certificates is checked, but if the certificate status cannot be  
obtained due to a network issue, the certificate will be considered valid.  
High: The revocation status of certificates is checked. A certificate is only considered valid after  
verifying that the certificate has not been revoked.  
3. Next, under Retrieval of Certificate Status, select the option for By OCSP for Common Access  
Card setup.  
Note: The By Retrieving CRL option checks the certificate status on the Printer after retrieving a CRL.  
4. Next, under the URL for the OCSP Responder With option, this should be setup by the System  
Administrator for the Common Access Card setup. There is also an option to use an URL that’s  
available on a certificate.  
5. Next, set the OCSP Communication Timeout Value option based on your network performance.  
6. Under the CRL options, verify that the check mark box for Auto Retrieval of CRL is unchecked.  
Note: The CRL Retrieval Time-out is not required for Common Access Card setup.  
7. Upon making your selections, select the Apply button to register your selections. This will initiate  
the printer to reboot, allowing the settings to take effect.  
Configuring E-mail Signing Feature  
The following procedure will be performed at the printer.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select the option for System Settings.  
6. Locate and select the option for Connectivity & Network Set-up.  
7. On the right side of the display, scroll down the list and locate the option for Security Settings.  
8. Select the option for S/MIME Settings.  
For Option #6 Digital Signature – Outgoing Mail, select the option for Always Add Signature  
and press the Save button.  
For Option #7 Signing Certificate – Outgoing Email, select the option for SmartCard  
Certificate and press the Save button.  
9. Press the Log In/Out button, and select the option for Reboot.  
96  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
Enabling Options with Software Keys  
Options such as Scanning (E-Mail, Folder, Network, Twain), Security (Disk Overwrite, Secure  
Watermark), Internet Fax (iFAX), Server Fax, and Job Based Accounting, require purchase and  
subsequent enabling with a supplied 12 character key. Software keys are usually included with the kit  
documentation as a sticker on the manual, or they may be already installed on the printer as per the  
purchase agreement.  
Upon receipt of the software key, use the following procedure to enable the associated Option.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Touch System Settings.  
6. Touch Common Service Settings.  
7. Touch Maintenance. Note that you may have to use the scrolling arrow to see this selection.  
8. Touch Software Options and touch Keyboard. Enter the key, using the on-screen keyboard, in the  
box provided.  
9. Touch Save, then touch Reboot.  
98  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Special Features  
Special Features  
Some features can be customized, and special features can be enabled. For example, you can change  
the duration of built-in timers. Contact your Xerox representative for more information about special  
features, and special feature codes.  
To enable a special feature:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
4. Click the Security folder, then Feature Enablement.  
5. Enter the code for the special feature and click Apply.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
99  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
Scan to E-mail  
E-mail Overview  
You must purchase the Scanning option to Scan to E-mail. If you did not, contact your Xerox  
Representative to purchase this option.  
The following E-mail features are available.  
E-mail: Scanned documents can be converted into an electronic format and transmitted via E-mail.  
iFAX: Unlike conventional fax machines which utilize public phone lines, the printer can transmit or  
receive scanned data as e-mail attachments using either corporate networks or the Internet.  
Contents of E-mail are processed according to the settings of Print iFAX Headers and Contents in  
CentreWare Internet Services.  
E-mail Printing: E-mail with attachments in either TIFF or PDF format can be sent to the printer.  
Received E-mail will automatically be printed. Contents of E-mail are processed according to the  
settings of Print Mail Headers and Contents in CentreWare Internet Services.  
Job Completion Notice: When a computer has submitted a job to the printer, a notification of the  
job’s completion can be sent by E-mail.  
Xerox recommends that you register the address of a network administrator or a shared address.  
Preparations  
Before you set up the Scan to Email feature, confirm that:.  
1. The printer is turned on and connected to a network.  
2. TCP/IP protocol is enabled on the printer.  
3. The device has been set up with DNS.  
4. The Domain Name settings for the network have been correctly setup for the printer.  
Obtain the following information:  
Item  
Description  
SMTP, POP3, or SMTP mail server  
Host Name or IP address.  
If using an external mail server, ask your internet service provider to  
provide this information.  
SMTP, POP3, or SMTP login and  
password.  
The printer’s assigned email address. This E-mail address will appear in the From field on E-mails sent from  
the printer.  
Email addresses (optional).  
LDAP server host name.  
A local address book can be created to store E-mail addresses.  
Email addresses stored in a network address book LDAP can be  
referenced from the printer.  
100 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
       
Scan to E-mail  
Registering an E-mail account  
A mail account for the printer needs to be registered to a mail server when using POP3 mail receiving  
protocol.  
Note: For information on mail account registration, refer to your mail server documentation.  
Configuring E-mail Environment  
Enable the E-mail ports and configure the printer E-mail address, TCP/IP environment, and E-mail  
server from the printer.  
Installation Procedure  
This section describes the configuration procedure to use the E-mail feature on the printer.  
The following two steps are necessary to use the E-mail feature.  
Enabling the E-mail ports and setting TCP/IP  
Configuring the E-mail Environment  
Enabling the E-mail Ports and Setting TCP/IP  
First enable the E-mail ports, then set the IP address.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select System Settings.  
6. Select Connectivity & Network Setup.  
7. Select Port Settings.  
8. On the Port Settings screen, select Send E-mail and then select Change Settings.  
9. On the Send E-mail screen, select Port Status and select Change Settings.  
10. On the Send E-mail Port Status screen, select Enabled then select Save.  
11. Select Close.  
12. On the Port Settings screen, select Receive E-mail, then select Change Settings.  
13. On the Receive E-mail screen, select Port Status, then Change Settings.  
14. On the Receive E-mail Port Status screen, select Enabled, then select Save and Close.  
15. On the Port Settings screen, select Email Notification Service, then select Change Settings.  
16. On the Email Notification Service screen, select Port Status, then Change Settings.  
17. Select Enabled, then Save.  
18. Select Close until the Tools screen is displayed.  
19. Set an IP address.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 101  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
If an IP address is already set, this step is not necessary. Also, in an environment with DHCP or  
BOOTP, configure the way to obtain an IP address. If the address cannot be obtained  
automatically or static configuration is preferred, configure an IP address, a subnet mask, and a  
gateway address as stated below.  
a. Select Protocol Settings.  
b. Select IPv4 (or other mode) Address Resolution and then select Change Settings.  
c. Select one from DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, DHCP/Autonet or Static and then select Save. If you  
select anything other than Static, proceed to Step 4.  
Note: When using a DHCP server, also configure the DNS, or WINS (Windows Internet Name Service)  
server (WINS for SMB support). To set a DHCP server, use CentreWare Internet Services.  
d. On the Protocol Setting screen, select TCP/IP - IP Address and select Change Settings.  
e. Enter the IP address using the numeric keypad.  
Note: Enter address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The xxx should be a numeric value in the range from  
0 to 254. 224 – 255.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be used.  
Note: When moving to the next value without entering all 3 digits, select Next.  
f. Select Save.  
g. Configure TCP/IP - Subnet Mask and TCP/IP - Gateway Address using the same process as  
stated above.  
Note: Enter the Gateway address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The xxx should be a numeric value in  
the range from 0 to 255. However, 224 – 255.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be used.  
Note: Specify the subnet mask by a combination of the numbers 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254,  
and 255. However, you cannot use 0 between non-zero values.  
Note: If you do not set the gateway address, enter 0.0.0.0.  
20. Select Close until the Tools screen is displayed.  
21. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
22. If you changed any settings, the printer will automatically reboot to register and enable your new  
settings. After the printer is restarted, print out a Configuration Report to confirm that the ports are  
enabled and TCP/IP is correctly configured.  
For information on how to print a Configuration Report, see Configuration Report on page 22.  
Configuring E-mail  
Note: This can also be done using CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, see CentreWare  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on screen, and select Enter.  
Note: The default user ID is admin. When using the Authentication feature, a password is required. The  
default password is 1111.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
102 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Scan to E-mail  
4. Set the E-mail address, host name, and domain name.  
a. Select the Tools tab.  
b. Select Connectivity & Network Setup.  
c. Select Machine’s E-mail Address/Host Name.  
d. Select E-mail Address and then select Change Settings.  
e. Enter an E-mail address using the displayed keyboard.  
f. Select Save.  
g. Set a host name and a domain name.  
h. Select Close.  
If SMTP has been selected as the Mail Receiving Protocol  
Aliases cannot be configured. A user can choose an account name (the left side of the @). An address  
(the right side of the @) is a combination of a host name and a domain name.  
Example: [email protected]  
Account name: mymail  
Host name: myhost  
Domain name: example.com  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 103  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
Acceptable SMTP Mail Address Formats  
Received Mail Destination  
Services  
Description  
BOX***@Host name.Domain name  
Fax  
Print  
(*** = Mailbox number)  
If a Mailbox number that is not setup is  
specified, it is a receive error.  
If a Mailbox number out of range is specified, it  
is printed.  
Password for Mailbox needs to be set to No (no  
password).  
Machine will ignore the case in the text string  
BOX.  
For ***, the mailbox number setup on a receiver  
machine is specified in three digits. The scope  
of specification is 001 to 200.  
As the mailbox number is embedded in a part  
of a mail address, input just normal destination  
as usual.  
Example:  
“AX=###@ Host name.Domain name” Store to Folder ( ### means FAX number at transfer destination)  
Print If judged as syntax error, it is printed.  
Example:  
Any local part other than the above@ Store to Folder Host name.domain name  
Fax  
The local part means the left text string of @ in  
a mail address.  
Example:  
If POP3 has been selected as the Mail Receiving Protocol  
Specify a POP user name to an account name (the left side of the @), and a POP3 receiving mail server  
to an address (the right side of the @). A user can decide an alias such as [email protected].  
Example: [email protected]  
Account name : mymail  
Set the protocol for receiving E-mail.  
1. From the Connectivity & Network Setup list, select Other Settings.  
2. Select Protocol to Receive E-mail and then select Change Settings.  
3. Select either SMTP or POP3 as appropriate for your environment.  
4. Select Save and then press Close.  
104 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Scan to E-mail  
If SMTP has been selected as the Mail Receiving Protocol  
1. From the Connectivity & Network Setup list, select Outgoing/Incoming Email Settings (i.e. E-mail  
Send/Receive Settings).  
2. Select SMTP Server Settings and then set the following item for the SMTP server.  
SMTP Server Port Number: Enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535. The default is 25.  
If POP3 has been selected for the Mail Receiving Protocol  
1. From the Connectivity & Network Setup list, select Outgoing/Incoming Email Settings (i.e. E-mail  
Send/Receive Settings).  
2. Select POP3 Server Settings and then set the following items for the POP3 server.  
Server Name/IP Address: Enter the POP3 Server Name/IP Address and press Save.  
Note: Enter the address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The xxx should be a numeric value in the range  
from 0 to 255. However, 224 – 255.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be used.  
Port Number: Enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535. The default is 110.  
Note: Do not use the numbers of any other ports.  
Pollling Interval: Set the interval for checking the e-mail on the POP3 server.  
Login Name: Enter the name to log in to the POP3 server and press Save.  
Password: Enter the same password twice in the New Password and Re-enter Password. If you  
do not set the password, leave it blank and select Save.  
POP Password Encryption: Select On (APOP) to encrypt the password, if desired. Select Save  
and then press Close.  
3. Set the protocol for sending E-mail.  
From the Connectivity & Network Setup list, select Outgoing/Incoming Email Settings, then select  
SMTP Server Settings, and set the following items for the SMTP server.  
SMTP Server Name/IP Address: Enter the SMTP Server Name/IP Address and press Save.  
Note: Enter the address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The xxx should be a numeric value in the range  
from 0 to 255. However, 224 – 255.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be used.  
SMTP Server Port Number: Enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535. The default is 25.  
Note: This configuration is not necessary if SMTP has been selected for the Mail Receiving Protocol and  
has already been configured.  
E-mail Send Authentication: Select Off, POP before SMTP, or SMTP AUTH. If you are having  
trouble sending E-mail, to see if Authentication is the problem, set this item to Off and set the  
SMTP Server IP Address (above) to a server that does not require authentication.  
Note: If POP before SMTP is selected, the POP3 settings must be set.  
SMTP AUTH Login Name: Set this item if SMTP AUTH is selected for E-mail Send  
Authentication.  
SMTP AUTH Password: Set this item if SMTP AUTH is selected for E-mail Send Authentication.  
Enter the same password twice in the New Password and Re-enter Password. If you do not set  
the password, leave it blank and select Save.  
4. Select Close until the Connectivity & Network Setup list is again displayed.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 105  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
5. Setting S/MIME Security (optional).  
a. From the Connectivity & Network Setup list, select Security Settings. If the selection is not  
visible, use the scrolling arrow to display it.  
b. Select S/MIME Settings and set the following items.  
Device Certificate – S/MIME: Link a certificate to the printer. You must have an S/MIME  
certificate on the printer to perform encryption. For information on S/MIME certificates, see  
S/MIME Communication: Set whether to enable or disable S/MIME Communication when a  
certificate ID is set.  
Receive Untrusted E-mail: Set whether to receive untrusted E-mail or not.  
Receive Untrusted iFAX : Set whether to receive untrusted iFAX or not.  
Message Digest Algorithm: Select a message digest algorithm from SHA1 or MD5.  
Message Encryption Method: Select a contents encryption method from 3DES, RC2-40, RC2-  
64, or RC2-128.  
Digital Signature – Outgoing E-mail: Set whether to always attach a digital signature to E-  
mail or to select a digital signature when sending E-mail.  
Digital Signature – Outgoing iFAX: Set whether to always attach a digital signature to iFAX or  
to select a digital signature when sending iFAX.  
Signing Certificate for Email Attachment: Device Certificate allows you to determine which  
certific ate is to be used to sign Email attachment. Smart Card Certificate is only effective when  
Always add signature is selected for Digital Signature – Outgoing Email.  
Certificate Auto Store: Select whether or not to automatically store a S/MIME certificate  
attached with the E-mail when receiving E-mail sent from an address registered in the address  
book.  
6. Select Close repeatedly until the Tools screen is displayed.  
7. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
8. After the printer is restarted, print a Configuration Report to confirm that each item is configured.  
For information on how to print a Configuration Report, see Configuration Report on page 22.  
9. Test the E-mail transmission from the printer by pressing the Services button, then touching the on-  
screen E-mail button, then the New Recipient button. Type in your E-mail address, then press Close.  
Place a document in the document feeder and press the green Start button on the control panel.  
Note: To set up the address book for use with LDAP (network search), see LDAP Authentication on  
LDAP Server Configuration  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder, then the LDAP folder.  
4. Click LDAP Server, and under Server Information, enter the IP address (or host name) in the box  
Note: If entering the LDAP address by host name, make sure to use the fully qualified domain name of  
the LDAP server (for example, ldapserver.mycompany.com)  
106 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Scan to E-mail  
5. Enter the Port Number (default 389).  
6. Specify the LDAP server type from the LDAP Server drop down list.  
7. If desired, enter the path to the LDAP objects to limit the LDAP search in the Search Directory Root  
area. The entry should be in base DN format (for instance, ou=people, dc=xerox, dc=com).  
8. For Login Credentials to search entries, choose whether system credentials entered on CentreWare  
Internet Services will be used for LDAP queries, or the Credentials of the Remotely Authenticated  
User (Credentials entered by the user when logging in at the machine’s control panel). For System  
Login Name and Password, enter the Login Name and Password (if required) in the boxes provided  
for access to the LDAP server.  
Note: Login credentials are not required to supply address information for E-mail.  
9. Enter your required number for Maximum Number of Search Results. This is the maximum number  
of addresses that will appear which match the search criteria selected by the user.  
10. Select Use LDAP Server Time-Out or select Wait and enter a Search Time-Out (5-120 seconds).  
11. Select the LDAP Referrals: Enabled check box if you would like the server to refer to additional  
LDAP servers, when user information is initially unavailable.  
12. If using LDAP Referrals, enter the number of additional servers (1-5) to check for user information  
(LDAP Referral Hop Limit).  
13. For Perform Query On, select the method that you would like LDAP to use to perform searches.  
Mapped Name Field: Will search on the single LDAP field currently mapped to Common Name  
on the LDAP User Mappings page  
Surname and Given Name Fields: Will combine the sn and givenName fields in LDAP and  
search on the combination of both.  
14. Click Apply, and enter the Administrator User name and password if prompted.  
15. To enable encryption (SSL) for LDAP communications, perform the following.  
a. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter  
to open CentreWare Internet Services.  
b. Click the Properties tab.  
c. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
d. Click the Security folder.  
e. Click SSL/TLS Settings.  
f. Check the Enabled check box next to LDAP – SSL / TLS Communication.  
g. Click Apply and enter the Administrator User name and password if prompted.  
h. Reboot the printer.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 107  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
LDAP User Mappings  
You can click LDAP User Mappings in the LDAP setup section to test LDAP searches, verify mappings  
and specify the attributes to search for within the LDAP database. The LDAP test function will perform  
the same search that would occur at the machine’s control panel. It will base its search on the current  
settings for Search Name Order (Mapped Name Field or the combination of Surname, GivenName, the  
LDAP field currently Mapped to Common Name on the LDAP User Mappings page (if Search Order is  
set to Mapped Name Field) and Custom Filters (if configured). The test page will return the first  
matching search result for the test name entered and populate the LDAP Mappings drop down boxes  
with all LDAP fields / attributes returned for that entry.  
Note: The device uses partial name searches, so searching for smit, will return Smith, Joe; Smithson,  
John; etc. This can be overridden using custom filters.  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder, then the LDAP folder.  
5. Click LDAP User Mappings  
6. To verify / change LDAP mappings, you must first perform a test search. In the User Name box,  
enter a name or part of a name that is in LDAP and press the Search button.  
7. If the search is successful, the drop down boxes in the Properties section and the Example of search  
result column will get populated with the results. Change the Imported Headings drop downs to  
match the LDAP field you wish to map to the associated property (Common Name, Email Address,  
Business Phone, Office, Business Address, Home). If the search is not successful, verify LDAP  
settings and try again.  
Custom Filters  
You can click Custom Filters in the LDAP setup section to customize LDAP searches. For the Email  
Address Filter, in the box provided, type in the LDAP search string (filter) that you wish to apply. The  
filter defines a series of conditions that the LDAP search must fulfill in order to return the information  
you seek. The form of the typtext filesed search string (filter) is LDAP objects placed inside parenthesis.  
In the search filter, LDAP should be used to specify the text entered by the user as the search criteria.  
For example, to find all users with common name that starts with the search string entered by the user,  
the filter would be (cn=LDAP*). If you are not familiar with LDAP search strings, use an Internet browser  
search to find examples.  
E-Mail Recipient Control  
Domain Filtering  
Domain filtering allows you to configure a list of up to 50 domain names that are either:  
Restricted: Blocked as email recipients  
Authorized: Allowed as email recipients  
108 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scan to E-mail  
Using Blocked Domains will not allow the user to add any email recipient that is in the blocked domain  
list. All other domains are allowed. Using Allowed Domains will only allow the user to add recipients  
that are contained in the authorized domain list. All other domains are blocked.  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
4. Click the Services folder, then the Email folder.  
5. Click Defaults.  
6. In the General section, click Edit.  
7. In the Domain Filtering section, choose either Allow Domains to specify a list of authorized  
domain names or Block Domains to specify a list of restricted domain names.  
8. Scroll to the bottom of the screen and select Apply. You will be prompted to reboot the machine.  
9. Return to the Domain Filtering section and select the Edit button.  
10. Input up to 50 domain names in the domain list.  
11. Scroll to the bottom of the screen and click Apply. Supply the Administrator User name and  
password if prompted.  
Restricting a User from Editing the Address Book  
The machine can be configured such that users are not able to edit the public address book that is  
stored locally on the device. When using Local Authentication, you may grant certain users the  
privilege of editing the address book when this restriction is enabled (See Local Authentication setup).  
For all other types of authentication, only the System Administrator will be able to modify the public  
address book with this restriction enabled.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select System Settings.  
6. Select Common Service Settings  
7. Select Other Settings.  
8. Select Restrict User to edit Address Book and press Change Settings  
9. Choose Yes and press Save.  
Only Allow Recipients from the Address Books  
The machine may be configured to only allow the user to select email recipients from the Address  
Books. This will prevent emails to any recipients that are not contained in the address books. To ensure  
security, the users should be restricted from editing the address book when enabling this setting (see  
above).  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 109  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select System Settings.  
6. Select Common Service Settings  
7. Select Other Settings  
8. Select Recipient Selection Method and press Change Settings.  
9. Choose Only from Address Book and press Save.  
Automatically Add User to the To or CC fields and Locking the Recipient List  
The machine may be configured to automatically add the authenticated user to the To and/or the CC  
fields when sending an email. Additionally, you may restrict the user from adding any additional  
recipients so they are only authorized to email their own account. To enable this feature you must:  
Configure LDAP.  
Configure Authentication.  
Restrict Access to (Lock) the E-mail service.  
Enable Add me to To field or Add me to CC field.  
Lock the recipient list (optional)  
2. Configure Authentication. See Configuring Authentication on page 63.  
3. Restrict Access to (Lock) the E-mail service. See Access Control on page 73.  
4. Enable Add me to To field or Add me to CC field and lock the recipient list.  
a. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter  
to open CentreWare Internet Services.  
b. Click the Properties tab.  
c. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
d. Click the Services folder, then the Email folder  
e. Click Defaults  
f. Check the Enabled check box next to Add me to To field to automatically add the user as a To  
recipient.  
g. Check the Enabled check box next to the Add me to CC field to automatically add the user as  
a CC recipient.  
h. Lock the recipient list (optional). In the Edit E-mail Recipients section, uncheck the Enabled  
check box.\  
i. Click Apply and enter the Administrator User name and password if prompted.  
110 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Scan to E-mail  
Custom Keyboard Button  
You can customize the .com button on the keyboard of the control panel.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select System Settings.  
6. Select Common Service Settings.  
7. Select Screen / Button Settings.  
8. Select Customize Keyboard Button.  
9. Enter the text to appear on the custom keyboard button.  
10. Press Preview to preview the custom keyboard button.  
11. Press Save.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 111  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
Network Scanning (Using Templates)  
Overview  
Network Scanning is an optional feature for this printer, available for purchase from your Xerox Sales  
Representative.  
Network Scanning allows a user to scan an original document and convert it to an electronic file. The  
final destination of the electronic file depends on the template chosen by the user at the printer.  
The template may reside on the printer, or may be cached on the printer from a pool of templates  
pulled from a remote server.  
The set up of templates, template pool servers, and file repositories is accomplished using Centreware  
Internet Services (the printer’s internally-contained Web pages) as stated in this section.  
Once the scanned file is stored on the pre-determined server, the file can be redirected and  
manipulated with such software as the following:  
SMARTsend scanning services  
Built on the Microsoft .NET platform, this server-based software works with new and legacy  
Multifunction Systems to enable hardcopy documents to be scanned in black and white or color, and  
converted into such standard digital formats as PDF, JPEG, and TIFF. This Web-based application  
requires no additional client software installation and uses wizards to simplify workflow (template)  
creation. Once a workflow, or distribution process, is created, it can be saved as a paper or electronic  
cover sheet. The cover sheet can be set up to direct the scanned file to a wide variety of destinations.  
Such destinations include an email address or distribution list, network folder, FTP folder, remote  
printer, Web URL, Domino.doc, Domino, Microsoft SharePoint and Xerox DocuShare.  
Scan to PC Desktop  
For information regarding the use of Scan to PC Desktop, including Paperport, OmniPage, and  
ImageRetriever applications, see Scan to PC Desktop on page 136.  
Additional Notes  
Network Scanning User Authentication  
Authentication can be enabled to prevent unauthorized access to the Network Scanning feature. If  
Authentication is enabled, users will be prompted to enter a 4 to 12 digit pass code before they can  
access the Network Scanning feature. For more information see Authentication on page 62.  
112 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Network Scanning (Using Templates)  
Multifunction Printer Authentication  
If using a SMARTsend server, a valid Windows account must be created on the SMARTsend Server for  
the printer's authentication. The account enables each device to communicate with the SMARTsend  
server to exchange template information and other configuration data. For account creation  
instructions, refer to the FreeFlow SMARTsend Installation and Administration Guide.  
Template Considerations when using SMARTsend  
A single Xerox printer cannot use both CentreWare Network Scanning services and SMARTsend. If  
legacy CentreWare Network Scanning Services templates need to be utilized within SMARTsend, use  
the SMARTsend Template Importer to import the desired templates, as stated in the FreeFlow  
SMARTsend Installation and Administration Guide.  
Use of a Validation Server  
If you will be communicating with HTTPS to servers using SSL/TLS encryption, you can set the host  
name and directory (which might be a cache on a Repeater) of the Validation Server used to validate  
Digital Certificates over the enterprise network. To set these parameters, enter the IP Address of the  
printer into your Web browser and press Enter. Click the Properties tab in CentreWare Internet  
Services, then click the Services folder. Select Network Scanning, then Validation Server. Select HTTP  
or HTTPS, enter the host name of the server, then enter the directory name (if required) specified by  
the validation server manufacturer. Click Apply.  
Installation Checklist  
Please ensure that the following items are available or have been performed.  
1. Ensure the printer is on and connected to a network.  
2. Enable the purchased Scanning option. For instructions, see Enabling Options with Software Keys  
on page 98. Contact your Xerox Sales Representative if you have not purchased the Scanning  
option.  
3. Ensure that the TCP/IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the printer and are fully functional.  
This is required to access CentreWare Internet Services to configure Network Scanning.  
To verify that the TCP/IP and HTTP protocols are correctly configured, print a Configuration Report.  
For more information see Configuration Report on page 22.  
To configure TCP/IP, see TCP/IP Protocol Configuration on page 43.  
4. Ensure that the FTP Client and SMB port are enabled on the printer. To verify this, print a  
Configuration Report.  
To enable FTP and SMB, see Scan to PC (FTP/SMB) on page 121.  
5. Note that after configuring a scan filing location (file repository) you need to create at least one  
template for users to select to scan their documents to the pre-configured repository.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 113  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
Configure a Scan Filing Location  
Scanning with the printer is accomplished through user selection of templates on the printer that route  
scanned jobs to network servers. After storage on the server, the files can be retrieved at any properly  
configured networked computer. A dedicated file server is not required to receive scans. A dedicated  
server is required, however, for the installation and use of SMARTsend software to remotely manage  
the pool of templates (workflows), displayed locally to device users, if so desired. Scanning is  
configured on the printer using one of the file transfer options below.  
FTP (File Transfer Protocol): Requires an FTP service running on a server or a computer.  
SMB (Server Message Block): Available for filing to an environment that supports the SMB  
protocol.  
Note: As other filing methods become available, their configuration will be similar to the procedures for  
configuring scan filing repositories using FTP and SMB described in this section.  
Configure a Scan Filing Repository using FTP  
Installation Checklist  
1. Ensure that a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) service is running on the server or computer where images  
scanned by the printer will be stored. Write down the IP address or host name.  
2. Create a user account and password for the printer. When a document is scanned, the printer logs  
in using the account, transfers the file to the server or computer and logs out. Write down the user  
account and password.  
3. Create a directory (folder) within the FTP root to be used as a scan filing location (repository). Write  
down the directory name.  
Enter the Scan Repository Details in CentreWare Internet Services  
1. At your computer, open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the Address or  
Location field. Press Enter.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Services folder, then the Network Scanning file folder.  
4. Click the File Repository Setup.  
5. Select Edit, or a File Repository Setup number in the Default File or Alternate File Destinations list,  
then click Edit.  
6. Enter a Name to describe the File Repository.  
7. Select FTP for Protocols.  
8. Enter either an IP Address or Host Name for the server.  
9. Enter 21 for Port Number.  
10. For Document Path, type in the name of the folder on the remote server that has been set up to  
receive device scans. Do not use forward slashes as the printer will add them by default.  
11. Supply the Login Name and Password for the printer to log into the file server. The default login  
method is System (for automatic device log in). Available options are Authenticated User and  
Domain, Authenticated User, Prompt at User Interface, and System. If Remotely Authenticated  
114 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Network Scanning (Using Templates)  
User (and domain) is selected, the authenticated user (and domain) details will be used for  
authentication at the file repository. (Remote Authentication must be configured). If Prompt at  
User interface is chosen, user will be prompted at the time of the scan. If system is selected, the  
Login Name and Password specified for System will always be used for authentication at the file  
repository.  
12. Re-enter the password.  
13. Click Apply.  
14. Enter the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin and 1111.  
15. Test the FTP connection by logging into the scan directory from a remote PC using the user  
account and password. Create a new folder within the directory and then delete the folder. If you  
cannot perform this function, check the user account access rights and FTP service setup.  
Configure General Settings  
1. Click General.  
2. To print a Confirmation Sheet after every scan job, select On from the Confirmation Sheet drop  
down menu.  
3. Check the User Name and Domain Name boxes if you want these items to appear on the Job Log.  
The Job Log works with the Document Management Fields feature and is filed with the scan job.  
4. Click Apply.  
5. Enter the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin and 1111.  
Configure a Scan Filing Repository using SMB  
Installation Checklist  
1. Create a shared folder to be used as a scan filing location (repository) for scanned documents.  
Note the Share Name of the folder and the Computer Name or Server Name.  
2. Create a user account and password for the printer with full access rights to the scan directory.  
Write down the user account and password.  
3. Test the settings by attempting to connect to the shared folder from another PC by logging in with  
the user account and password. Create a new folder within the directory and then delete the folder.  
If you cannot perform this function check the user account access rights.  
Enter the Scan Repository Details in CentreWare Internet Services  
1. At your computer, open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the Address or  
Location field. Press Enter.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Services folder, then the Network Scanning file folder.  
4. Click the File Repository Setup.  
5. Select Edit, or a File Repository Setup number in the Default File or Alternate File Destinations  
list, then click Edit.  
6. Enter a Name to describe the File Repository.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 115  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
7. Select SMB for Protocols.  
8. Enter either an IP Address or Host Name for the server.  
9. Enter 445 for Port Number.  
10. Enter the Share Name in the Share box.  
11. For Document Path, type in the name of the folder on the remote server that has been set up to  
receive device scans. Do not use back slashes as the printer will add them by default.  
12. Supply the Login Name and Password for the printer to log into the file server. Note that the  
default login method is System (for automatic device log in).  
13. Re-enter the password.  
14. Click Apply.  
15. Enter the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin and 1111.  
Configure General Settings  
1. Click General.  
2. To print a Confirmation Sheet after every scan job, select On from the Confirmation Sheet drop  
down menu.  
3. Check the User Name and Domain Name boxes if you want these items to appear on the Job Log.  
The Job Log works with the Document Management Fields feature and is filed with the scan job.  
4. Click Apply.  
5. Enter the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin and 1111.  
Configure Scan to HTTP  
The printer can be configured to scan to either an HTTP or an HTTPS destination. To set up a remote  
template pool repository, see the next procedure.  
To Configure the Scan Repository Details using CentreWare Internet Services:  
1. At your computer, open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the Address or  
Location field. Press Enter.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Services folder, then the Network Scanning folder.  
4. Click File Repository Setup.  
5. On the File Repository Setup page, in the Default File Destination box, click Edit.  
6. On the File Destination page, in the Settings area:  
a. On the Friendly Name line, type the name of the file destination.  
7. In the Protocol drop down box, click HTTP or HTTPS.  
b. The Settings area refreshes and displays more options.  
c. If you are using HTTP:  
On the Host Name / IP Address & Port line, type either an IP Address or Host Name for the  
server.  
In the Port Number box (unlabeled), type 80.  
116 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Network Scanning (Using Templates)  
d. If you are using HTTPS:  
On the Host Name / IP Address & Port line, type either an IP Address or Host Name for the  
server.  
In the Port Number box (unlabeled), type 443.  
If you are using SSL, select the Validate Repository SSL Certificate (trusted, not expired,  
correct FQDN) check box.  
e. For either HTTP or HTTPS, if you are using a proxy server:  
Click View HTTP Proxy Server Settings.  
On the Proxy Server page, verify that the settings match those in your proxy server  
environment. Make changes as needed, then click Apply.  
f. On the Document Path line, type the HTTP address. Example: /Inetpub/wwwroot/scans/.  
g. In the Login Credentials to Access the Destination area, click your choice of log in credentials to  
be used.  
h. Type the Login Name and Password for the printer.  
i. Type the password in the Retype Password box.  
j. Click Apply.  
8. If prompted. type the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin  
and 1111.  
9. To set up a remote template pool repository, see the next procedure, Setting up a Remote  
Template Pool Repository.  
Setting up a Remote Template Pool Repository (optional)  
1. At your computer, open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the Address or  
Location field. Press Enter.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Services folder, then the Network Scanning file folder.  
4. Click the Advanced folder, then click the Template Pool Setup.  
5. On the Template Pool Setup page, in the Remote Template Repository area:  
a. In the Protocol drop down box, click HTTP or HTTPS.  
The Remote Template Repository area refreshes and displays more options.  
b. If you are using HTTP:  
On the Host Name / IP Address & Port line, type either an IP Address or Host Name for the  
server.  
In the Port Number box (unlabeled), type 80.  
c. If you are using HTTPS:  
On the Host Name / IP Address & Port line, type either an IP Address or Host Name for the  
server.  
In the Port Number box (unlabeled), type 443 for the port number.  
If you are using SSL, click the Validate Repository SSL Certificate (trusted, not expired,  
correct FQDN) check box.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 117  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
d. For either HTTP or HTTPS, if you are using a proxy server:  
Click View HTTP Proxy Server Settings.  
On the Proxy Server page, verify that the settings match those in your proxy server  
environment. Make changes as needed, then click Apply.  
e. On the Script path and filename (from HTTP root) line, type the script path and filename  
(from HTTP root). Example: /xerox.asp.  
f. On the Document Path line, type the HTTP address. Example: /Inetpub/wwwroot/scans/.  
g. Type the Login Name and Password for the printer.  
h. Retype the password.  
i. Click Apply.  
6. If prompted. type the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin  
and 1111.  
Configuring the Default Template in CentreWare Internet Services  
You need to create at least one template for users to select to scan their documents to the pre-  
configured repository. This template is often referred to as the Default Template. The template can be  
created with either CentreWare Internet Services or SMARTsend software running on a remote  
template pool server. Once a default template has been created, users can use the Scan tab of  
CentreWare Internet Services to create individual templates, using the default template as a base.  
To create and configure the default template with CentreWare Internet Services, perform the following  
steps:  
1. At your computer, open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the Address or  
Location field. Press Enter.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Services folder, then the Network Scanning file folder.  
4. Click the Default Template.  
5. To edit the filing destinations, on the Default Template page, in the File area, click Edit.  
6. In the Filing Destination area:  
a. Select a filing policy from the drop down list. Note that you can simply accept the default  
policy (Rename New File).  
b. For File Destination, note that the displayed destination should match the information  
previously entered when you configured your Scan Filing Repository. If you have more than  
one repository, the drop down list allows you to choose your repository.  
c. To add a scanning destination subdirectory, in the Add (Optional) box, type the name of the  
subdirectory to be added.  
d. Click Apply to save any changes, or Undo to exit without saving changes. If you clicked Apply,  
be prepared to enter the administrator User Name (default of admin) and Password (default of  
1111), if prompted.  
118 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Network Scanning (Using Templates)  
7. Document Management Field (Optional)  
Click Add to add data fields to the template. Note that if the box contains listings, you can make  
individual selections, then click Edit instead. This information is filed with your scanned document  
in the Job Log. The Job Log can then be accessed by third-party software and the information  
retrieved and associated with the scanned file.  
a. Click Add.  
b. Refer to the displayed descriptions to set your parameters as desired.  
c. Click Apply when done.  
8. To set parameters for the default template, select Edit for any of the available categories of  
settings. These include: Network Scanning, Advanced Settings, Layout Adjustment, Filing Options,  
Report Options, Network Scanning Image Settings, and Compression Capability. Click Apply to  
save your settings.  
9. Linearized PDF files allow the first page of a large PDF file to be displayed in a user's Web browser,  
before the entire file is downloaded from the Web server. This fast first page display helps to  
alleviate Internet user frustration in waiting for an entire file to download before displaying the  
file's contents.  
10. To set the printer to create linearized PDF files:  
a. On the Default Template page, in the Network Scanning Image Settings area, click Edit.  
b. In the Fast Web Viewing Options area, click Linearized PDF.  
c. Click Apply.  
11. Searchable PDF and PDF/A. The Searchable Format provides a second layer of data with the text of  
the scanned document. The second layer is converted via OCR technology, enabling the text of the  
document to be searched, copied, and pasted.  
12. To set the printer to create searchable PDF files:  
a. On the Default Template page, in the Network Scanning Image Settings area, click Edit.  
b. In the Searchable PDF Defaults area, click Searchable.  
c. Click Apply.  
XPS is Microsoft's electronic paper format, an alternative to PDF. XPS is currently supported as a saved  
file format in Microsoft Office 2007, with an XPS viewer built into Windows Vista. Microsoft states that  
Windows Vista uses the XPS format as a document format, a windows spool file format, and a page  
description language for printers.  
Note: If the Searchable XPS option is available, the Searchable Format provides a second layer of data  
with the text of the scanned document. The second layer is converted via OCR technology, enabling  
the text of the document to be searched, copied, and pasted.  
Select MRC Compression, if available, to use Mixed Raster Content (MRC) compression. MRC is used to  
divide the scanned image based on content, and then compress each area in the optimal manner for  
that image area. This option allows for smaller output files with better image quality.  
Note: Some PDF reading application s may not support MRC compressed PDF’s.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 119  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
Setting up a Remote Template Pool Repository (optional)  
1. At your computer, open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the Address or  
Location field. Press Enter.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Services folder, then the Network Scanning file folder.  
4. Click the Advanced folder, then click Template Pool Setup.  
5. For Protocol, use the drop down menu to select the protocol you will be using to communicate with  
the template pool server. Current selections are FTP, NewWare, SMB, HTTP, and HTTPS. Other  
selections, when available, will be set up similarly.  
6. Supply the Host Name / IP Address (and Share Name, in the case of SMB).  
7. Supply the Port Number. The default is 21 for FTP, 445 for SMB, and 80 for HTTP and HTTPS.  
8. For Document Path, type in the name of the folder on the remote server containing the pool of  
templates. Do not use forward slashes with FTP or back slashes with SMB.  
9. Supply the Login Name (account name) and Password for the printer to access the remote server.  
Note: For information on creating accounts on the SMARTsend server, refer to the FreeFlow SMARTsend  
Installation and Administration Guide.  
10. Re-enter the password in the Retype Password box.  
11. If available, check the Polling Settings check box to set up automatic, timed polling with the  
template pool server. This will help to assure that the latest scanning templates are available to  
users of the printer.  
12. Click Apply.  
13. Enter the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin and 1111.  
Testing Network Scanning (using templates)  
1. Press the Services button on the control panel.  
2. Press the Network Scanning button.  
3. See if the template you created is displayed on screen.  
4. If it is, press it. If it is not, return to the beginning of this section and repeat the required  
procedures.  
5. Place a document in the document feeder and press the Start button.  
6. On a network-connected PC, open a connection to the repository server, log in, and see if the  
document arrived in the repository folder.  
120 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scan to PC (FTP/SMB)  
Scan to PC (FTP/SMB)  
Overview  
This feature is designed to convert scanned data to TIFF, JPEG, or PDF format, and then use the FTP or  
SMB protocol to send the data to a computer (server or computer) on the network.  
Note: It is assumed that you purchased the Scanning option to enable Scanning to FTP/SMB with your  
printer. If you did not, contact your Xerox Representative to purchase this option.  
Note: For scanning to SMB, make sure that a shared folder is created for saving scanned data on the  
network.  
Note: For scanning to FTP, make sure that the server is running the FTP service and that you have  
created a directory within the FTP root to be used as a scan filing location.  
Requirements for FTP  
When using FTP transmission, one of the following FTP servers, with an account on that server (login  
name and password), is required.  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 6.0  
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server, Microsoft Windows Server 2008, Microsoft Windows 2000  
Professional, Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows Vista  
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 3.0 or later  
Mac OS X  
FTP service of Mac OS X 10.1.5/10.2.x/10.3.8/10.3.9/10.4.2  
Refer to the manual provided with the software for how to configure the FTP service.  
Requirements for SMB  
When using SMB transmission, a computer running one of the following Operating Systems, which  
includes a shared folder, is required.  
Microsoft Windows 2000  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
Microsoft Windows XP  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 121  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Scanning and Faxing  
Installation Procedure  
This section describes the configuration procedure to use the Scan to PC (FTP/SMB) feature on the  
printer.  
The following two steps are necessary to use the Scan to PC (FTP/SMB) feature.  
1. Enable the required ports and set TCP/IP. Enable the FTP port and SMB port on the printer, and  
then set the printer’s IP address. If you will be using SMB on a Microsoft Network, make sure to  
enable either DNS or WINS as part of the TCP/IP configuration. For FTP, make sure that DNS is  
enabled.  
2. Preparing an FTP directory or SMB shared folder on the receiving computer (server or computer).  
Create an FTP directory or SMB shared folder to receive scanned documents over the network.  
Enabling Ports and Setting TCP/IP  
To use Scan to PC (FTP/SMB) you need to enable the applicable Ports (SMB or FTP client) on the printer,  
and make sure that an IP address has been set on the printer.  
Note: The configuration can also be performed using CentreWare Internet Services. For information,  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. When using the SMB protocol, enable the SMB port.  
a. Select Connectivity & Network Setup.  
b. Select Port Settings.  
c. Select SMB and then select Change Settings.  
d. Select Port Status and then select Change Settings.  
e. Select Enabled then select Save.  
f. Select Close until the Port Settings screen is displayed.  
6. When using the FTP protocol, enable the FTP client port.  
a. From the Tools tab, select Connectivity & Network Setup, then Port Settings.  
b. From the Port Settings screen, select FTP Client and then select Change Settings.  
c. Select Port Status and then select Change Settings.  
d. Select Enabled then select Save.  
e. Select Close repeatedly until the Tools screen is displayed.  
122 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Scan to PC (FTP/SMB)  
7. Set an IP address.  
If an IP address is already set, this step is not necessary. Also, in an environment with DHCP or  
BOOTP, configure the way to obtain an IP address. If the address cannot be obtained  
automatically, or static configuration is preferred, configure an IP address, a subnet mask, and a  
gateway address as follows.  
a. Select Protocol Settings.  
b. Select IPv4 (or other mode) Address Resolution, then select Change Settings.  
c. Select one from DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, DHCP/Autonet or Static, and then select Save. If you  
select anything other than Static, proceed to Step 5.  
Note: When communicating by TCP/IP make sure to enable the use of a DNS (or WINS for SMB) server  
in CentreWare Internet Services.  
d. On the Protocol Settings screen, select TCP/IP – IP Address and then Change Settings.  
e. Enter the IP address using the numeric keypad.  
Note: Enter the address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The xxx should be a numeric value in the range  
from 0 to 255. However, 224 – 255.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be used.  
f. Select Save.  
g. Configure TCP/IP – Subnet Mask and TCP/IP – Gateway Address using the same process as  
stated above.  
Note: Enter the Gateway address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The xxx should be a numeric value in  
the range from 0 to 255. However, 224 – 255.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be used.  
Note: Specify the subnet mask by a combination of the numbers 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254,  
and 255. However, you cannot use 0 between non-zero values.  
Note: If you do not set the gateway address, enter 0.0.0.0.  
8. Select Close until the Tools screen is displayed.  
9. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
10. If you changed any settings, the printer will automatically reboot to register and enable your new  
settings. After the printer is restarted, print out a Configuration Report to confirm that the ports are  
enabled and TCP/IP is correctly configured. For more information, see Configuration Report on  
Receiving Computer Configuration  
The following describes the configuration procedure for the receiving computer (server or computer).  
Using FTP  
1. Ensure that File Transfer Protocol (FTP) services is running on the server or computer where images  
scanned by the printer will be stored. Note down the IP address or host name.  
2. Create a user account and password for the printer. When a document is scanned, the printer logs  
in using the account, transfers the file to the server or computer and logs out. Note down the user  
account and password details.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 123  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
3. Create a directory within the FTP root to be used as a scan filing location (repository). Note down  
the directory path.  
4. Test the FTP connection by logging in to the scan directory from a PC with the user account and  
password. Create a new folder within the directory and then delete the folder. If you cannot  
perform this function check the user account access rights and the FTP service setup.  
Using SMB  
1. Create a shared folder to be used as a scan filing location (repository) for scanned documents.  
Note the Share Name of the folder and the Computer Name or Server Name.  
2. Create a user account and password for the printer with full access rights to the scan directory.  
Note down the user account and password.  
3. Test the settings by attempting to connect to the shared folder from another PC by logging in with  
the user account and password. Create a new folder within the directory and then delete the folder.  
If you cannot perform this function check the user account access rights.  
Adding the Receiving Computer’s Address to the Address Book  
To direct your scanned documents to the appropriate receiving computer (server or computer) you will  
need to add the Receiving Computer’s Address to the printer’s Address Book as follows.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select Setup & Calibration, then touch Address Book.  
6. Select an available Address Number.  
7. Touch Create/Delete.  
8. Touch Address Type, then touch Change Settings.  
9. Select Server as the address type, and select Save.  
10. Select each item to be set, and select Change Settings. When each setting is complete, select  
Save.  
11. Select Transfer Protocol from the Configuration Report and select FTP or SMB or SMB (UNC  
format).  
12. When FTP or SMB is selected, touch Server Name/IP Address on the Configuration Report and  
enter the Host name or IP Address of the computer (server or computer) designated to receive  
scanned files. When entering a Host name, use the fully qualified domain name. For example:  
myhost.example.com. Do not use forward or backward slashes.  
13. Select Shared Name (SMB Only) to enter the name of the shared folder on the receiving  
computer. Enter the name only, without any backward slashes.  
14. Select Save In to enter the directory for storing documents. When FTP or SMB is selected, supply  
the name of the directory (without any forward or backward slashes). When SMB (UNC format) is  
selected, if available, use the Universal Naming Convention format such as \\host name\shared  
name\directory name.  
124 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scan to PC (FTP/SMB)  
15. Select User Name and provide the User account name assigned to the directory on the receiving  
computer.  
16. Select Password and provide the password to access the User account on the receiving computer.  
17. Select Port Number to set the communications port number. Standard Port is recommended.  
18. When done changing and saving settings, touch Close (repeatedly, if necessary) to exit to the  
Tools screen.  
19. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
Using the Scan to PC (FTP/SMB) Feature  
After the appropriate ports have been enabled, TCP/IP has been configured, and the receiving  
computers address added to the Address Book, the Scan to PC (FTP/SMB) feature can be used as  
follows.  
1. Select Scan to PC from the Services screen.  
2. Touch Transfer Protocol, select a protocol, and touch Save.  
3. Note that you can touch the blank lines on the screen and manually enter Server settings, or touch  
Address Book. For SMB you can also browse the Microsoft Network.  
4. Select the Receiving Computer (computer or server) in the list contained in the Address Book and  
touch Save.  
5. Place your document in the document feeder and press the control panel’s large, green Start  
button. Progress of the data transfer will be displayed on screen.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 125  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
Scan to Home  
The Scan to Home option is supported through the Network Scanning service. Essentially, it is a  
template file (.xst) stored locally on the printer, but in a different directory than the network scanning  
templates or folder folders.  
To acccess the Scan to Home template, press the Services button at the control panel, and touch  
Network Scanning . The printer queries LDAP to acquire the authenticated user’s home directory, or  
appends the authenticated user’s login name to a predefined network home path.  
Preparing for Scan to Home Installation  
1. Ensure the printer is fully functioning on the network prior to installation.  
2. Enable the Scan to Home option. For instructions, see Enabling Options with Software Keys on  
page 98. Contact your Xerox Sales Representative if you have not purchased the Scan to Home  
option.  
3. Ensure that the TCP/IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the printer and fully functional. This  
is required to access CentreWare Internet Services to configure Network Scanning.  
4. Enable LDAP authentication. For more information, see LDAP Authentication on page 66.  
5. Configure the LDAP protocol for the System (or an Authenticated User) to log in to the LDAP server.  
Configure Scan to Home  
Note: Scan to Home does not work without Remote Account mode.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Touch Authentication / Security Settings, then Authentication, then Login Type. Select Login to  
Remote Accounts.  
6. Select Save.  
7. Select Yes to change login type.  
8. Press the Login/Out btton.  
9. Select Reboot Now.  
10. At your computer, open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the Address or  
Location field. Press Enter.  
a. Click the Properties tab.  
b. Select the Security folder.  
11. Select the Remote Authentication Servers folder.  
126 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Scan to Home  
12. Select Authentication System, select LDAP from the Authentication Settings drop down list, then  
click Apply. Click Reboot Machine.  
13. Select Authentication Configuration.  
14. In the Login Type box, select Login to Remote Accounts, then click Apply. The printer will reboot.  
15. At your computer, open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the Address or  
Location field. Press Enter.  
16. Click the Properties tab.  
17. Select the Services folder.  
18. Select the Scan to Home folder.  
19. Select General.  
20. On the Scan to Home page, in the Status area:  
a. On the Status line, click the enabled box.  
b. In the Friendly Name box, type in a user-recognizable name of up to 35 characters for the  
template that will appear in Template Details on the printer’s touch screen.  
c. On the Determine Home Directory line, ensure that the radio button next to LDAP Query is  
selected.  
d. The printer will query the LDAP server with the user’s authenticated login name and retrieve  
the user’s home directory to set up the template scanning path to that directory.  
21. In the LDAP Mapping for Home Directory area:  
a. To define the LDAP home directory to a name other than homeDirectory, click LDAP Mapping  
for Home Directory.  
b. To create a scanning subdirectory within the user’s home directory, select Automatically  
Create Subdirectory and specify a general name.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 127  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
Scanning to the Printer’s Hard Drive (Folders)  
You must purchase the scanning option to scan to a folder on the printer’s hard drive. Contact your  
Xerox Representative for more information.  
Refer to the Enabling Options with Software Keys in this section to enable your purchased option on  
the printer with the supplied 12 character key.  
Setting Up Folders at the Printer  
Scanning to the printer's hard drive requires the set up of individual Folders to receive scanned files. Up  
to 200 Folders can be set up to support this type of scanning. To set up Folders, perform the following  
steps:  
Note: If you log in as Administrator all folders are created with the owner as System Administrator.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Press Setup & Calibration.  
6. Press Create Folder.  
7. When the numbered list of folders is shown on screen, use the supplied arrow keys to scroll through  
the list to locate an unassigned folder number.  
8. Select an unassigned folder number from the displayed list.  
9. Press the Create & Delete button in the lower right corner of the folder selection screen.  
10. When the New Folder – Passcode screen displays, use the On and Off buttons on the left side of the  
screen to determine whether or not a password will be required to access the folder. If On is  
selected, use the printer's numeric keypad to enter a numbered password.  
11. Press the Save button to save your settings. (To exit the screen, without saving settings, press the  
Cancel button.)  
12. When the Folder settings screen displays (after assigning a password), note that you have five  
setting selections displayed on five numbered horizontal lines. The available selections include:  
Folder Name, Check Folder Passcode, Delete Files After Retrieval, Delete Expired Files, and Link Job  
Flow Sheet to Folder.  
13. To assign a name to the folder, press the Folder Name selection line.  
14. Press the Change Settings button.  
15. Use the touch screen keyboard to enter a name for your folder.  
16. When finished entering in a name, press the Save button in the upper right corner of the screen.  
(To exit the screen, without saving changes, press the Cancel button.)  
17. On the Folder settings screen, press any other selection lines of interest and touch the Change  
Settings button, as previously described, to access and make setting changes. Use the Save button  
to save your changes.  
128 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
       
Scanning to the Printer’s Hard Drive (Folders)  
18. To exit the Folder settings screen, press the Close button in the upper right corner of the screen.  
19. To exit the screen that lists all assigned and unassigned folders, press the Close button in the upper  
right corner of the screen.  
Configuring Expiration Settings for Stored Documents  
This setting allows the System Administrator to set a document expiration timer to delete documents  
stored in, but not retrieved from, folders.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. On the keypad enter admin or the current System Administrator Login ID. Touch Next when  
finished.  
3. On the keypad enter 1111 or the current Passcode. Touch Enter when finished.  
4. From the Tools screen, use the arrow control in the Group menu to scroll to Stored File Settings.  
5. Select Expiration Date for Files in Folder and touch Change Settings.  
6. Select On, set the timer controls, and touch Save.  
7. Make any other selections desired, press Change Settings, then press Save.  
8. Press Close to return to the Tools screen.  
9. To exit the Tools screen, wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
Setting Up Folders with CentreWare Internet Services  
Note: Scanning to the printer's hard drive requires the set up of individual Folders to receive scanned  
files. Up to 200 Folders can be set up to support this type of scanning. To set up Folders, perform the  
following steps:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Scan tab.  
3. Click Folder.  
4. When the numbered list of folders is shown, locate an unassigned folder number from the  
displayed list and click the Create button for that folder.  
5. Type in a name for this Folder in the Folder Name entry box.  
6. Type in a pass code in the Folder Passcode entry box.  
7. Confirm the pass code by retyping it in the Retype Passcode box.  
8. Use the drop down arrow to set Check Folder Passcode to Always (recommended) to secure your  
folder.  
9. Place a checkmark in the Delete Files after Print or Retrieve box if you wish to delete documents  
from your folder after retrieving or printing.  
10. Place a checkmark in the Delete Expired Files with box to use this feature in place of, or as an  
augmentation to, Auto Delete.  
11. Click Apply when done.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 129  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
Scanning to Folders  
Scanning to the printer's hard drive requires the set up of individual folders to receive scanned files. Up  
to 200 folders can be set up to support this type of scanning. To learn how to set up an individual  
To scan to a Folder, perform these steps:  
1. From the printer's Main screen, press the Scan to Folder button.  
2. When the Scan to Folder screen displays, a list of Folders will be shown. Use the supplied arrow to  
scroll through the icons to locate your Folder.  
3. Select your Folder by pressing its selection line on the touch screen.  
4. When the Password screen displays, enter your password (series of numbers) using the control  
panel's numeric keypad.  
5. Press the Confirm button on the touch screen.  
6. Use the displayed controls to set up scanning parameters, then place your document in the  
document feeder, and press the control panel’s large, green Start button.  
7. Press the Services button to return to the printer’s Main screen.  
Retrieving Images from Folders  
Images are retrieved from Folders using CentreWare Internet Services.  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Scan Tab.  
3. Click Folder.  
4. Locate your folder, then click File List.  
5. Enter your Passcode when prompted and click Apply.  
6. Use your mouse to place a check mark in the box in front of the file that you wish to retrieve.  
7. After selecting individual retrieval options, click the Retrieve button. Note that you can also specify  
printing options and print the document by clicking Print File.  
8. Click Save this provided on the next screen displayed to begin the image downloading process.  
9. Note that after downloading a document, you can delete that document from your Folder by  
rechecking the box in front of the file just downloaded and clicking the Delete button.  
130 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Setup and Use of Job Flow Sheets with Folders  
Setup and Use of Job Flow Sheets with Folders  
Overview  
Job flow is a feature for executing a series of registered actions.  
The target of a job flow is documents stored in a Folder.  
Two methods are available:  
Automatically start a job flow when a document is stored in a Folder  
Select a job flow to manually act on documents stored in a Folder.  
To start a job flow, you must link the job flow sheet to a Folder, or to documents within a Folder.  
Documents are then processed as specified on the job flow sheet.  
To automatically document processing in a Folder with a job flow sheet, see Creating a Folder and  
To manually link document processing in a Folder with a job flow sheet, see Manually Linking to a Job  
Features supported for Job Flow  
Incoming Folder Documents  
Available Outgoing processing  
Faxes for private polling  
Printing, Fax forwarding (up to 100 recipients), iFAX transmission (up to  
100 recipients  
Scanned documents  
Fax to Folder  
Printing, Fax forwarding (up to 100 recipients), iFAX transmission (up to  
100 recipients  
Printing, Fax forwarding (up to 100 recipients), iFAX transmission (up to  
100 recipients  
iFAX received  
Printing, Fax forwarding (up to 100 recipients), iFAX transmission  
depending on System Administration mode settings  
Enabling Ports and Setting TCP/IP  
In order to use the job flow service, you must enable the SOAP port, the SNMP port, the Internet  
Service (HTTP) port, and set IP addresses. The procedure for setting the printer is as follows.  
Note: The configuration can also be performed using CentreWare Internet Services. For more  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 131  
System Administrator Guide  
       
Scanning and Faxing  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Enable the SOAP port.  
a. Select Connectivity & Network Setup.  
b. Select Port Settings.  
c. Select SOAP and then select Change Settings.  
d. Select Port Status and then select Change Settings.  
e. Select Enabled then select Save.  
f. Select Close until the Port Settings screen is displayed.  
6. Enable the SNMP port.  
a. Select SNMP and then select Change Settings.  
b. Select Port Status and then select Change Settings.  
c. Select Enabled then select Save.  
d. Select Close until the Port Settings screen is displayed.  
e. Enable the Internet Service (HTTP) port using the same process as stated above.  
f. Select Close repeatedly until the Tools screen is displayed.  
7. Set an IP address.  
If an IP address is already set, this step is not necessary. Also, in an environment with DHCP or  
BOOTP, configure the way to obtain an IP address. If the address cannot be obtained  
automatically, or static configuration is preferred, configure an IP address, a subnet mask, and a  
gateway address as follows.  
a. Select Protocol Settings.  
b. Select IPv4 (or other mode) Address Resolution and then select Change Settings.  
c. Select one from DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, DHCP/Autonet or Static, and then select Save. If you  
select anything other than Manual, proceed to Step 5.  
Note: When communicating by TCP/IP make sure to enable the use of a DNS (or WINS for SMB)  
servere in CentreWare Internet Services.  
d. On the Protocol Settings screen, select TCP/IP – IP Address and then Change Settings.  
e. Enter the IP address using the numeric keypad.  
f. Enter the address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The xxx should be a numeric value in the range  
from 0 to 255. However, 224 – 255.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be used.  
g. Select Save.  
h. Configure TCP/IP – Subnet Mask and TCP/IP – Gateway Address using the same process as  
stated above.  
Note: Enter the Gateway address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The xxx should be a numeric value in  
the range from 0 to 255. However, 224 – 255.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be used.  
Note: Specify the subnet mask by a combination of the numbers 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254,  
and 255. However, you cannot use 0 between non-zero values.  
If you do not set the gateway address, enter 0.0.0.0.  
8. Select Close until the Tools screen is displayed.  
132 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Setup and Use of Job Flow Sheets with Folders  
9. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
10. If you changed any settings, the printer will automatically reboot to register and enable your new  
settings. After the printer is restarted, print out a Configuration Report to confirm that the ports are  
enabled and TCP/IP is correctly configured. For information on how to print a Configuration Report,  
Configuring the SNMP Port  
Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port using CentreWare Internet Services.  
1. Start a Web browser on a network connected computer.  
2. Enter the printer’s IP address in the address box of the browser and press Enter.  
3. Click the Properties tab.  
4. Click Port Status.  
5. Select (place a checkmark in) the UDP check box next to SNMP.  
6. Click Apply.  
7. Enter the System Administrator user ID and password when prompted and click OK.  
8. Click the Reboot button when it displays. If a Reboot button fails to display, click the Status tab  
and click Reboot Machine from that screen.  
Creating Job Flow Sheets  
Before you can a job flow sheet to a folder, you need to create at least one job flow sheet. To create a  
job flow sheet, perform the following steps.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select Setup & Calibration.  
6. Touch Create Job Flow Sheets.  
Note: If this selection is unavailable, follow the instructions in the next topic, Creating a Folder and  
Linking to a Job Flow Sheet, to create your flow sheet.  
7. Touch Create.  
8. Select items to be set from the displayed item list, then touch Change Settings. When done, touch  
Save.  
Name: Set the name, up to 128 characters in length, for the job flow sheet.  
Description: Set the description, up to 256 characters in length, for the job flow sheet.  
Keyword: Enter a keyword, up to 12 characters in length, for job flow search.  
Send as Fax: Specify the fax transmission address. You can specify a total of up to 100  
addresses, using either Address Numbers or by manual input (New Recipient).  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 133  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Scanning and Faxing  
Send as iFAX: Specify the E-mail address. You can specify the address using either the Address  
Book, or by manual input (New Recipient).  
Send as E-mail: Specify the E-mail address. You can specify the address using either the  
Address Book, or by manual input (New Recipient).  
Transfer via FTP (1) and (2): Specify transfer to an FTP server. You can specify the address  
using either the Address Book, or by manual entry into the boxes supplied.  
Transfer via SMB (1) and (2): Specify transfer to an SMB server. You can specify the address  
using either the Address Book, or by manual entry into the boxes supplied.  
Print : Select On (if desired), then specify Print and Finishing settings. This prints a copy of your  
document after it has been scanned.  
9. When done with setting selections, touch Save.  
10. Touch Close or Exit to exit the Setup Menu screen and return to the Tools screen.  
11. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
Creating a Folder and Linking to a Job Flow Sheet (for Automatic Processing)  
Before you can a job flow sheet to a folder, you need to create at least one folder for your use. In the  
process of creating the folder, you can to your newly created Job Flow Sheet.  
To create a folder and it to a Job Flow Sheet (for automatic processing), perform the following steps.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select the Setup & Calibration button.  
6. Press the Create Folder button.  
7. When the numbered list of Folders is shown on screen, use the supplied arrow keys to scroll through  
the list to locate an unassigned Folder number.  
8. Select an unassigned Folder number from the displayed list.  
9. Press the Create & Delete button in the lower right corner of the Folder selection screen.  
10. When the New Folder – Passcode screen displays, use the On and Off buttons on the left-hand side  
of the screen to determine whether or not a password will be required to access the Folder. If On is  
selected, use the printer's numeric keypad to enter a numbered passcode of up to 20 digits.  
11. Press the Save button to save your settings. (To exit the screen, without saving settings, press the  
Cancel button.)  
12. When the Folder settings screen displays (after assigning a password), note that you have five  
setting selections displayed on five numbered horizontal lines. The available selections include:  
Folder Name, Check Passcode, Delete Documents After Retrieval, Delete Expired Documents, and  
Job Flow Sheet to Folder.  
13. To assign a name to the Folder, press the Folder Name selection line.  
14. Press the Change Settings button.  
15. Use the touch screen keyboard to enter a name for your Folder.  
134 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Setup and Use of Job Flow Sheets with Folders  
16. When finished entering in a name, press the Save button in the upper right corner of the screen.  
(To exit the screen, without saving changes, press the Cancel button.)  
17. On the Folder settings screen, press any other selection lines of interest and use the Change  
Settings button, as previously described, to access and make setting changes. Use the Save button  
to save your changes.  
18. To link this Folder with your Job Flow Sheet, touch Job Flow Sheet to Folder and touch Change  
Settings.  
19. Touch Create/Change to set the Folder to a previously-created Job Flow Sheet.  
Note: If no Job Flow sheets are displayed, press Create to create one and follow the instructions  
supplied in the Creating Job Flow Sheets topic in this section.  
20. Select your Job Flow Sheet from the list (clicking Refresh, if necessary) and touch Save.  
21. Touch the Auto Start check box to place a checkmark in the box for automatic processing of  
documents as they are received in the Folder.  
22. To exit the Job Flow Sheet to Folder screen, press the Close button in the upper right corner of the  
screen.  
23. To exit the Folder settings screen, press the Close button in the upper right corner of the screen.  
24. To exit the screen that lists all assigned and unassigned Folders, returning to the Tools screen, press  
the Close button.  
25. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
Manually Linking to a Job Flow Sheet to Documents in a Folder  
1. Touch Send from Folder on the Services screen.  
2. Select a Folder, enter the password, then touch Confirm.  
3. On the Document List screen, select a document.  
4. Touch Job Flow Settings.  
5. Touch Select Job Flow Sheet.  
6. Select a job flow sheet and press the on-screen Start button.  
Testing Job Flow Sheet Operation (for Automatic Processing)  
1. Press the Services button on the control panel.  
2. Touch Scan to Folder.  
3. Select your Folder, enter the password, then touch Confirm.  
4. Place a document in the document feeder.  
5. Select your scanning options.  
6. Press the control panel’s large, green Start button.  
7. Check the destination that was specified on your Job Flow Sheet to verify that the document was  
received.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 135  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
Scan to PC Desktop  
Overview  
Scan to PC Desktop is now a core element of the Xerox FreeFlow Digital Workflow collection for the  
office.  
With either solution, the purpose of PaperPort is to create a program on the networked PC, providing a  
windows-style desktop for the management of scanned image and text items.  
The purpose of OmniPage is to quickly turn PDF files into easily editable word processing and  
spreadsheet documents.  
The purpose of Image Retriever 5.2 is to provide a method to monitor a specified server folder for  
incoming scanned items. Monitoring of E-mail can also be added in the case of the Professional  
program edition.  
The Scan to PC Desktop solution is typically sold in 25 user licenses packages. For enterprises requiring  
more than 100 licenses, special pricing is available. Consult your Xerox Representative for details.  
Perform the procedures for setting up this device to Scan to SMB. For more information, see Scan to PC  
Software Installation Procedure  
To install Scan to PC Desktop components on networked computers, refer to the Scan to PC Desktop  
Network Installation Guide, Version 7.0. This document should have come with your software license  
package, and is also available from www.xerox.com/support. If you go to the Web site, type Scan to PC  
Desktop in the upper right corner Search box and press Enter. Select Support under FreeFlow Scan to  
PC Desktop. Select your language and click Go.  
The software manufacturer requires PaperPort to be installed before Image Retriever in all cases. Also,  
during the installation of PaperPort Professional 10, PDF Create! 2.0 must be installed.  
Configure Image Retriever 5.2 on Networked Computers  
Referring to the Scan to PC Desktop: Image Retriever 5.2 documentation, configure Image Retriever  
5.2 on the networked computers.  
Testing Scan to PC Operation  
1. Perform a scan at the printer.  
2. Go to a networked computer running Image Retriever 5.2.  
3. Right click the Image Retriever icon in Windows.  
4. Click the Settings command to display the Image Retriever Settings dialog.  
5. Verify that the SMB Repository (server) UNC is pointing correctly to the server and shared folder.  
136 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Scan to PC Desktop  
6. Click Get Now.  
7. Start the PaperPort program and verify that the scanned item appears on the PaperPort desktop.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 137  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
Installing and Using the Network Scanner Utility  
To retrieve scanned documents directly from a folder into an image-editing application such as  
Adobe® Photoshop®, you need to install the Network Scanner Utility (scan driver) on your computer.  
You can additionally install and use Network Scanner Utility 3 to view and import scanned files,  
without using a client-side image-editing program. For Network Scanner Utility 3 installation  
instructions, refer to instructions contained on the Driver/Network Utility CD ROM that came with the  
printer.  
Before Installing the Network Scanner Utility  
Before installing the Network Scanner Utility, make sure that your computer meets the following  
requirements:  
You must be running Windows XP or Windows 2000. Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server  
Terminal Service is not compatible with this feature.  
Your computer must be operating with a i486DX4/100 MHz processor or faster, have 32 MB RAM  
or greater, and have 40 MB or more of free hard drive space (not including space for storing  
scanned data).  
Your computer must be connected to a network using the TCP/IP protocol.  
Your image-editing application must be compatible with the TWAIN interface to import scanned  
data.  
Installing the Network Scanner Utility  
1. Insert the Driver/Network Utility (Windows) CD ROM into your computer’s CD drive.  
2. Open Windows Explorer, click the drive letter for your CD ROM drive, and open Drivers\Scan\Disk1.  
3. Double click Setup.exe and follow the instructions displayed on screen.  
Uninstalling the Network Scanner Utility  
1. From the Windows 2000 desktop, from the Start menu, select Settings, Control Panel, then double  
click Add/Remove Programs. On the Windows XP desktop, click Start, Control Panel, then double  
click Add/Remove Programs.  
2. Select Fuji Xerox Network Scanner Utility, then click Add Remove.  
3. Click Yes.  
Importing Scanned Data from the Folder to an Image-Editing Application  
1. Start a TWAIN-compatible application program, such as Photoshop.  
2. From the File menu, select the command for selecting the scan source (Import/Twain Source, in  
Photoshop).  
3. Select FX Network Scan from the displayed list and click Select.  
138 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
         
Installing and Using the Network Scanner Utility  
4. From the File menu, select the command to import the image from the scanner. In Photoshop, for  
example, this would be Import/Twain.  
5. If the scanner doesn't automatically display on screen allowing its selection with the Select  
Scanner button, perform the next six steps. Otherwise go to step 12 below.  
6. Click Refresh.  
7. Click Options.  
8. Click Change Display in the scanner selection box.  
9. To display scanners on other sub-networks, register them under Scanner Registration.  
10. Click OK.  
11. Select the scanner for connection from the displayed list, then click Select Scanner. You can also  
double click the displayed scanner's name.  
12. Enter the folder number and password when prompted.  
13. Click Open Folder.  
14. From the displayed document list, select the document you wish to import and click Import.  
Importing Scanned Data from the Folder using Network Scanner Utility 3  
1. On your Windows desktop, select Start\Programs\FujiXerox\Network Scanner Utility\Network  
Scanner Utility 3.  
2. Select the scanner for connection from the displayed list, then click Select Scanner.  
3. If no items are shown in the list, click Refresh, then Options, then Change Display and register the  
scanner’s IP address and name. Click OK when done.  
4. Enter the folder number and password when prompted.  
5. Click Open Folder.  
6. From the displayed document list, select the document you wish to import and click Import.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 139  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
Xerox Extensible Interface Program  
Xerox Extensible Interface Platform (XEIP) enables independent software vendors and partners to  
develop customized programs to be accessed directly from the Xerox device. Users can enter their  
authentication login at the printer and access a set of features and options designed specifically for  
their business needs.  
For example, a hospital could customize the printer to help better manage patient forms. By touching  
an icon on the display, a healthcare worker could access the hospital's Web-based document  
management system and browse a list of patient forms.  
Users can quickly scan and capture paper documents, preview thumbnails, and add them to frequently  
used document storage locations. For example:  
A tutor can scan notes directly to a specific course repository for students to access.  
A student can scan assessment papers to their course folder for their tutor to mark.  
Xerox Extensible Interface Platform utilizes Web-based Xerox Partner solutions including Omtool™,  
Xerox Secure Access Unified ID System™ and FreeFlow™ SMARTsend™ to enable users to access  
document repositories at the printer display screen.  
Additional resources may be required on the printer depending on the solution. For further information,  
contact your Xerox Sales Representative.  
XEIP Setup  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
4. To enable the printer for XEIP applications:  
a. Click the Properties tab.  
b. Click the Services folder, the Custom Services folder, then Custom Services.  
c. In the Custom Services area, click Enabled.  
d. Click Apply.  
5. To enable a digital certificate (if needed):  
a. Click the Properties tab.  
b. Click the Security folder, then Machine Digital Certificate Management.  
c. Click Create New Certificate.  
d. Select Self-Signed Certificate or Certificate Signing Request (CSR). Click Continue.  
e. In the Create Self-Signed Certificate area, select Public Key Size. Click Apply.  
140 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Xerox Extensible Interface Program  
6. To enable SSL:  
a. Click the Properties tab.  
b. Click the Security folder, then SSL/TLS Settings.  
c. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
d. In the SSL/TLS Settings area, on the HTTP – SSL / TLS Communication line, click Enabled.  
e. Click Apply.  
Note: If changes were made to the SSL settings you may need to reboot the system. When SSL is  
enabled, you must enter https:// (before your printer’s IP address) in the address field of your browser  
to access CentreWare Internet Services. Example: https://13.140.244.11.  
7. To enable the ports:  
a. Click the Properties tab.  
b. Click the Connectivity folder, then Port Settings.  
c. On the SNMP line, click Enabled.  
d. On the SMB line, click Enabled.  
e. On the FTP Client line, click Enabled.  
f. On the SOAP line, click Enabled.  
g. Click Apply.  
8. To ensure that IPv4 is enabled by default:  
a. Click the Properties tab.  
b. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
c. In the Protocols folder, click TCP/IP.  
d. In the IP Mode area, on the IP Mode line, click or verify IPv4.  
e. If you clicked IPv4, click Apply.  
EIP applications can now register to the printer. You may need to map buttons to Custom Services  
at the printer in order to see the new applications.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 141  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
Fax  
Overview  
The optional Fax feature works much the same as a standard facsimile machine. Extra features,  
covered in this section, such as the Address Book, Group Dial, Comments, and the use of Folders, are  
meant to provide additional capabilities in support of the Fax feature.  
Note: It is assumed that you purchased the appropriate 1 or 3 line Fax hardware kit for use with your  
printer. If you did not, contact your Xerox Representative to purchase this option.  
Note: The FAX or Internet Fax (iFAX) features and the Server Fax feature are mutually exclusive. If  
Server Fax is enabled, even if the printer is equipped with an internal fax board, scanning to the internal  
FAX will be disabled. While the Server Fax feature is enabled, the iFAX service will also be disabled. Also  
note that Folder to FAX (a Job Flow Sheet destination) and Direct Fax (LAN Fax) are not supported  
when Server Fax is enabled. The default when both options have been installed is to enable the internal  
fax board and Internet Fax. Server Fax will be disabled. You can use CentreWare Internet Services, to  
select which Fax Service to enable. For more information see Server Fax on page 154.  
Checking and Setting Critical Fax Parameters  
Refer to the Fax Settings Topic (including Fax Defaults and Fax Control) in this section to determine if  
Fax Defaults and Fax Control parameters are correctly set for your environment.  
Before You Start  
You cannot use the printer with a call waiting service.  
A facsimile located close to a main unit of a cordless phone can cause distorted images or interrupted  
transmission. The printer should be installed at least five meters away from the main unit of the  
cordless phone.  
If the digital line leased for your company network is multiplexed, facsimile communication may be  
restricted as follows:  
The features using our unique transmission method, such as Recipient Print Sets, Relay Broadcast  
and Remote Folder, are not available.  
The transmission speed is limited.  
Super G3 cannot be used.  
Communications modes  
G3 (Auto) – Normal Fax communications: The printer automatically switches modes in the  
following order of priority: Unique SG3 - Unique ECM - Unique G3 - ITU-T SG3 - ITU-T ECM - ITU-  
TG3 depending on the capabilities of the remote terminal.  
F4800: Select this mode when transmitting over noisy or bad telephone lines, as can be the case  
with overseas calls.  
142 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Fax  
Connecting the Phone Line  
LINE 1 Connect the fax to a public switched telephone network (PSTN). An external telephone  
cannot be connected.  
TEL An external telephone is connected here.  
LINE 2 (Line 2) Connect to a public line.  
LINE 4 (Line 4) Connect to a public line.  
Local Terminal Information Settings  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Touch Fax Mode Settings.  
6. Touch Local Terminal Information.  
7. Select the items to enter information and touch Change Settings.  
a. Enter a Local Name, up to 20 characters, then touch Save.  
b. Enter a Company Logo, up to 30 characters, then touch Save.  
c. Enter a Machine Password, up to 20 digits, then touch Save.  
Note: The password prevents your machine from receiving faxes, or being polled by other machines  
that are not F-Code compatible.  
d. Enter G3 Fax ID, up to 20 digits, then touch Save.  
e. Enter G3 Dial Type, Tone, 10pps, or 20pps, then touch Save.  
f. Enter G3 Line Type, PSTN or PBX, then touch Save.  
8. When complete, touch Close repeatedly until the Tools screen is displayed.  
9. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
Address Book Setup  
Use of this feature enables Fax users to select recipients by 3 digit numbers, which can be used to  
support speed dialing.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select Setup & Calibration.  
6. Touch Add Address Book Entry.  
7. Select an available Address Number.  
8. Touch Create/Delete.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 143  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
9. Touch Address Type, then touch Change Settings.  
10. Touch Fax, then touch Save.  
11. Select the items you would like to enter information for and touch Change Settings.  
Fax Number: Up to 128 characters, then touch Save.  
Name: Up to 18 characters, then touch Save.  
Index: Only 1 digit (used for a quick find), then touch Save.  
Relay Station setup: On or Off, then touch Save.  
Starting Rate: G3 Auto or Forced4800bps, then touch Save.  
Resolution: Choose one, then touch Save.  
Cover Note: On or Off, then touch Save. If On, select Comment (Recipient Comment) then  
touch Save.  
Maximum Image Size: choose one then touch Save.  
Delayed Start: On or Off, then touch Save. If On, choose Start Time, then touch Save.  
Remote Folder: On or Off, then touch Save. If On, enter Folder number, then touch Next, and  
password if required.  
F Code: On or Off, then touch Save. If On, enter F Code and password, then touch Next.  
Note: F Code is the transmission procedure set by the Communications and Information Network  
Association of Japan. DTMF Method: G3 Fax machines that support Manual Send can also make Relay  
Broadcasts for the printer. Refer to the Fax section of the printer’s User Guide for full information.  
Relay Broadcast: On or Off (This feature supports transmitting documents through a Relay  
Station. Refer to the Fax section of the printer’s User Guide for full information.) If On, enter 2  
digit Relay Station ID, touch Enter/Change Recipients. Enter Address Number or the Group  
Number and touch Add. Print at Relay Station, On or Off, then Touch Save.  
12. When complete, touch Save to exit the settings screen.  
13. Touch Close to exit the Address Book screen, returning to the Tools screen.  
14. To exit the Tools screen, wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
Group Send Setup  
This setting supports Group Send (broadcast) Fax transmissions to up to 20 address numbers in a pre-  
designated group. Refer to the Group Send topic in the printer’s User Guide for full information. To set  
up a Group, perform the following steps.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select Setup & Calibration.  
6. Touch Group Send.  
7. Select a Group number.  
8. Touch Create/Delete.  
144 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Fax  
9. Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit Address Numbers of recipients contained in the  
printer’s Address Book.  
Note: Refer to the Address Book Setup topic in this section to learn how to set up address numbers so  
that they are available for selection here.  
10. Touch Add to this Group to add recipients, one number at a time, to the group.  
11. When complete, touch Save.  
12. Touch Close to return to the Tools screen.  
13. To exit the Tools screen, if desired, wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
Comments  
This feature can be used to add comments to a Cover Note (Cover Page).  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select Setup & Calibration.  
6. Touch Comments.  
7. Select a Comment number.  
8. Touch Create/Delete.  
9. Enter a Comment, up to 18 characters, then touch Save.  
10. When complete, touch Close until the Tools screen is displayed.  
11. To exit the Tools screen, if desired, wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
Create a Folder  
The printer has 200 folders available. A folder must be created before you can use Remote Folder or  
route received documents into folders (using the File Destination / Output Destination settings). Folder  
Fax Receive or Private Polling documents are stored in the Folder. This is also convenient for  
differentiating between received documents and documents to be transmitted (such as by Private  
Polling).  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select Setup & Calibration.  
6. Touch Folder.  
7. Select an unassigned Folder number from the displayed list.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 145  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
8. Touch Create/Delete.  
a. Check Passcode: Select On or Off, then touch Save. Note that it is recommended that you  
select On, then provide a password, to secure access to your Folder.  
b. Folder Name: Enter a name, then touch Save.  
c. Check Passcode: The selections below are viewable when On is selected.  
Save (Write): A password is required in selecting a folder.  
Print/Delete (Read): A password is required to print and delete folder documents.  
Always (All Operations): A password is required for both operations described above.  
d. Delete Documents After Retrieval  
No: Saves documents in Folder.  
Yes: Deletes documents from Folder.  
e. Delete Documents with Expiration Date  
No: Continues to save documents in Folder.  
Yes: Documents will be deleted from Folder after expiration date.  
f. Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder: Select this option, then touch Change Settings to link a Job  
Flow Sheet to this Folder. The Job Flow Sheet routes incoming jobs to other destinations  
specified on the Job Flow Sheet. To create a new Job Flow Sheet, to link to an existing Folder,  
touch Create/Change.  
Note: For full information on the use of Job Flow Sheets, see Setup and Use of Job Flow Sheets with  
9. When complete, touch Close until the Tools screen is displayed.  
10. To exit the Tools screen, wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
File Destination / Output Destination  
Received Fax documents will be routed to the output tray or Folder specified by these settings.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Touch Fax Mode Settings.  
6. Select File Destination/Output Destination.  
7. Select the Box Selector – Line Setup button.  
8. Touch Change Settings.  
9. Make the appropriate selections and touch Save when done.  
Note: If Box Selector is selected as an Output Destination, when On is selected, you will have to enter a  
folder number, then touch Save.  
10. When complete, touch Close until the Tools screen is displayed.  
11. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
146 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Fax  
Fax Forwarding  
For each Fax line, you can configure Incoming Faxes to be automatically routed to an internal Folder.  
Faxes that have been routed to one of these folders can be additionally sent to one or more of the  
following destinations upon being received:  
Print: Print a hardcopy output of the received Fax.  
Send as Fax: Forward the Fax to another Fax Number  
Send as Internet Fax: Forward the Fax to an Internet Fax Address  
Send as Email: Forward the Fax to an email recipient as an attachment  
FTP transfer: File the Fax to an FTP repository  
SMB transfer: File the Fax to an SMP repository  
To configure fax forwarding:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Services folder, then the Fax folder.  
4. Select Fax Receive Options.  
5. In the Folder Selector Setup section, select the check box next to the line you wish to configure and  
press Change Settings.  
6. Select the enable check box for Save Incoming Fax in Designated Folder, specify the Folder  
Number and press Apply. For more information see Create a Folder on page 145.  
7. Select Fax Receive Options again.  
8. In the Folder Selector Setup section, select the check box next to the line you wish to configure and  
click Change Settings.  
9. Select File Transfer Settings.  
10. Check the boxes next to all destination options you would like faxes for this line to be forwarded to  
and press Next.  
11. Enter appropriate settings for all selected destinations and press Apply.  
Fax Settings (including Fax Defaults and Fax Control)  
Common Settings: Audio Tones and Reports  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Touch Common Service Settings.  
6. Touch Audio Tones. Select an item to change (Tone, Volume, etc.), touch Change Settings, set the  
item, and touch Save.  
7. Touch Close to return to Common Service Settings selections.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 147  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
8. Touch Reports. Select each item of interest, then touch Change Settings to modify the desired  
setting. Touch Save to save any new settings.  
Job History Report: Automatically print every 50 print operations. Default is 0=0ff.  
Activity Report: Automatically print every 100 transactions. Select either On or Off.  
Transmission Report-Undelivered: Automatically print. Select either On or Off.  
Transmission Report-Job Deleted: Automatically print. Select either On or Off.  
Folder Report: Automatically print. Select either On or Off.  
Broadcast/Multi-poll Report: Automatically print. Select either On or Off.  
Relay Broadcast Report: Automatically print. Select Off, Send to Relay Station, Print at Local  
Station, Send to Relay, or Print at Local.  
Note: A Relay Station is another Fax-capable machine to which faxes can be sent. Use of the second  
machine can help to cut down on broadcast Fax phone charges, such as those associated with long  
distance calls.  
Scan File Transfer Report  
2-sided Report: Default is 1-sided.  
Recipient on Activity Report: How many characters from other party is printed on Activity  
Report. Select First 40 characters, or Last 40 characters.  
Job Flow Error Report: Automatically print. Select either On or Off.  
9. Touch Close to return to the Tools screen.  
Fax Mode Settings (including Fax Defaults and Fax Control)  
These settings include: Screen Defaults, Fax Defaults, Fax Control, File Destination / Output  
Destination, Reduce/Enlarge Presets, Original Size Defaults, and Local Terminal Information.  
For information on File Destination / Output Destination settings and Local Terminal Information  
settings see Fax on page 142.  
Note: Information on Fax Defaults and Fax Control is critical to the operation of the Fax feature and  
should be carefully evaluated to assure that settings are correct for the current working environment.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Touch Fax Mode Settings.  
6. Touch Screen Defaults.  
148 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Fax  
7. Select a Line to enter or change, then touch Change Settings. Touch Save to save any new  
settings.  
Fax Screen Default: Select General Settings or Address Book This will be the Fax service  
screen that users see when they touch the Fax button.  
Address Book Default: Leave this setting at the default of 1, or enter an address book (Fax  
folder) number to display when the Address Book button is touched by users of the Fax service  
screen. Note that the Fax folder needs to be created in advance of this setting.  
Transmission Screen: Select either On or Off.  
8. Touch Close until the Fax Mode Settings selections are again displayed.  
9. Touch Fax Defaults.  
10. Select a Line to enter or change, then touch Change Settings. Touch Save to save any new  
settings.  
Resolution  
Original Type  
Lighten/Darken  
Mixed Size Originals  
Starting Rate: Select G3 Auto or Forced4800bps.  
Delayed Start – Start Time: This can be a useful feature for saving time-based phone charges.  
Transmission Header Text: Select On or Off. This adds the sender name and phone number to  
faxes.  
Confirmation Options: Select On or Off. If set to On a report will print when transmission  
completes successfully.  
Delivery Receipts/Read Receipts  
iFAX Profile  
iFAX Subject  
11. Touch Close until the Fax Mode Settings selections are again displayed.  
12. Touch Fax Control.  
13. Select the Line to enter or change, then touch Change Settings. Touch Save to save any new  
settings.  
Re-enter Recipients  
Re-enter Broadcast Recipients  
Re-enter Speed Dial Recipients  
Transmission Header Text – Polling: You can leave this setting at its default value.  
Documents for Polling – Auto Delete: Set as desired to delete documents from folders after  
polling same.  
Rotate 90 degrees  
Sender ID  
Save Undelivered Faxes  
Save Deleted Faxes  
Saved Faxes – Auto Delete  
Transmission Interval  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 149  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
Batch Send  
Manual Send/Receive Default: Select the default setting for manual Fax operations.  
Fax Receiving Mode: Leave this setting at Auto Receive for unattended operation.  
Border Limit  
Auto Reduce on Receipt  
Tray for Printing Incoming Faxes  
2 Pages up on Receipt  
2-sided Print  
Edge Erase – Top & Bottom Edges  
Edge Erase – Left & Right Edges  
Reduce 8.5 x 11 Original to A4  
Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode  
Box Selector – Line Setup: Enable this setting to enable Fax Folders to receive incoming faxes.  
Memory Full Procedure  
Maximum Stored Pages  
Mixed Sized Originals Scanning Mode  
Folder Receive Display (Priorities 1 through 3)  
Direct Fax: To use Direct Fax from the PCL or PostScript driver, make sure this setting is  
Enabled.  
14. When complete, touch Close until the Tools screen is displayed.  
15. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
To Configure Fax to Folder  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Touch System Settings.  
6. In the Group column, touch Fax Service Settings.  
7. Touch System Settings. Under Group, select Fax Service Settings.  
8. Under Features, touch Fax Control.  
9. Touch Folder Selector Setup.  
10. Touch Change Settings.  
11. Touch Enable.  
12. Touch Save.  
13. Touch Close.  
14. Under Features, select Fax Received Options.  
15. Touch Folder Selector Setup.  
150 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Fax  
16. Touch the line you wish to configure.  
17. Touch Change Settings.  
18. Touch On.  
19. Enter the folder number (use leading zeros).  
20. Touch Save.  
21. Touch Close.  
22. Touch Close.  
23. Log out.  
LAN Fax (PCL Drivers)  
You can facsimile documents directly from your PC in the same way you would print a document. This  
is known as the LAN Fax.  
Initial Setup  
Refer to the TCP/IP Peer to Peer (LPR or Standard TCP/IP) Printing topic, in the Print Drivers section, and  
add the printer to the Windows 2000 or Windows XP desktop using a Standard TCP/IP Port. After the  
driver has been installed, perform the following steps:  
1. Right click the Printer’s icon and select Properties.  
2. Click the Options tab, then click the Get Information from Printer button.  
3. The Network Address box should now be displaying the printer’s IP address and a checkmark  
should appear in the Enable Bi-Directional Communication check box. Also, the Fax Module listing  
in the Items box should now be displayed as Available.  
Adding a Recipient to a Fax Phonebook  
1. From the File menu of your program, select Print to display the Print dialog.  
2. Check that the correct (PCL) printer is selected, and then click Properties to display the Properties  
dialog.  
3. On the Paper/Output tab, select Fax from the Job Type drop down menu. The options on the Fax  
tab will now be available for your selection.  
4. Select the necessary settings on the Fax tab.  
5. Click the Fax Phonebook button to select your fax recipient or to enter a new recipient.  
6. If your recipient is not selectable from an existing Phonebook, select New…, select Individual, click  
OK, enter the recipient’s Name and Fax number, and click OK.  
7. Click Close to close the Fax Phonebook dialog, then click OK.  
Sending the Fax  
1. When the Print dialog is displayed, click OK.  
2. On the Fax Recipient dialog, to send to the previously-entered, new recipient, click Look Up  
Phonebook.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 151  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
3. Double click the name of the new individual previously entered (in step 6 above) and click OK.  
Note: Alternatively, you can manually enter a Name (of up to 30 characters) and a Fax Number.  
4. Click OK, then OK again to send your Fax.  
LAN Fax (PostScript Drivers)  
You can facsimile documents directly from your PC in the same way you would print a document. This  
is known as the LAN Fax.  
Initial Setup  
Refer to the TCP/IP Peer to Peer (LPR or Standard TCP/IP) Printing topic, in the Print Drivers section, and  
add the printer to the Windows 2000 or Windows XP desktop using a Standard TCP/IP Port. After the  
driver has been installed, perform the following steps:  
1. Right click the Printer’s icon and select Properties.  
2. Click the Configuration tab, then click the Get Information from Printer button.  
3. The Network Address box should now be displaying the printer’s IP address and a checkmark  
should appear in the Enable Bi-Directional Communication check box. Also the Fax Module listing,  
in the Installable Options folder on the printer Settings tab, should now be displayed as Available.  
If it is shown as Not Available, click the selection and set the Fax Module listing to Available.  
Adding a Recipient to a Fax Phonebook  
1. From the File menu of your program, select Print to display the Print dialog.  
2. Check that the correct (PS) printer is selected, and then click Properties to display the Properties  
dialog.  
3. On the Paper/Output tab, select Fax from the Job Type drop down menu. The options on the Fax  
tab will now be available for your selection.  
4. Select the necessary settings on the Fax tab.  
5. Click the Fax Phonebook button to select your fax recipient or to enter a new recipient.  
6. If your recipient is not selectable from an existing Phonebook, select New…, select Individual, click  
OK, enter the recipient’s Name and Fax number, and click OK.  
7. Click Close to close the Fax Phonebook dialog, then click OK.  
Sending the Fax  
1. When the Print dialog is displayed, click OK.  
2. On the Fax Recipient dialog, to send to the previously-entered, new recipient, click Look Up  
Phonebook.  
3. Double click the name of the new individual previously entered (in step 6 above) and click OK.  
Note: Alternatively, you can manually enter a Name (of up to 30 characters) and a Fax Number.  
4. Click OK, then OK again to send your Fax.  
152 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Fax  
Stopping the Fax (when necessary)  
1. Go to the printer and press the Job Status button.  
2. Select the fax job you wish to cancel, in the Current and Pending Jobs list.  
3. Press Cancel to cancel the job.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 153  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
Server Fax  
Overview  
The Server Fax feature enables you to fax documents without having a telephone line directly  
connected to your printer. This is achieved by sending the documents to a separate, networked fax  
server with its owns to the telephone system.  
It is assumed that you already purchased and enabled the Scanning option. If you did not, contact  
your Xerox Representative to purchase same. A hard disk and network card are required device  
hardware. Their presence can be confirmed by printing a Configuration Report. For more infomation  
The Server Fax option also needs to be purchased from your Xerox Representative, then enabled on the  
printer using a software key. See Enabling Options with Software Keys on page 98.  
As stated in this section, you will be setting up a network connection to a Xerox-certified, third party fax  
server (server running fax management software) which will receive, store, and redirect incoming  
documents to the server's fax boards, or other destinations determined by fax server software setup.  
Note: The FAX or Internet Fax (iFAX) features and the Server Fax feature are mutually exclusive. If  
Server Fax is enabled, even if the printer is equipped with an internal fax board, scanning to the internal  
fax will be disabled. While the Server Fax feature is enabled, the iFAX service will also be disabled. Also  
note that Folder to fax (a Job Flow Sheet destination) and Direct Fax (LAN Fax) are not supported when  
Server Fax is enabled. The default when both options have been installed is to enable the internal fax  
board and Internet Fax. Server Fax will be disabled. You can use CentreWare Internet Services, to select  
which Fax Service to enable. For more information see Server Fax on page 154.  
Installation Checklist  
Please ensure that the following items are available or have been performed.  
1. Ensure the printer is fully functioning on the network prior to installation.  
2. Enable the purchased Scanning option. For more information see Enabling Options with Software  
Keys on page 98. Contact your Xerox Sales Representative if you have not purchased the Scanning  
option.  
3. Enable the purchased Server Fax option. For more information see Enabling Options with Software  
Keys on page 98. Contact your Xerox Sales Representative if you have not purchased the Server Fax  
option.  
4. Verify that Scan to Fax Server is now the currently enabled Fax Service, as follows:  
a. At your computer, open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the  
Address or Location field. Press Enter.  
b. Click the Properties tab.  
c. Click the Services folder.  
d. Click the Fax folder.  
154 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Server Fax  
e. Click Fax Repository Setup and verify that Scan to Fax Server is displayed in the selection box.  
f. Enter the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin and 1111.  
5. Ensure that the TCP/IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the printer and are fully functional.  
This is required to access the printer's CentreWare Internet Services Web pages, which can be used  
to configure Server Fax settings from a network-connected computer.  
To verify that the TCP/IP and HTTP protocols are correctly configured, print a Configuration Report.  
For more information Configuration Report on page 22.  
To configure TCP/IP, see TCP/IP Protocol Configuration on page 43.  
7. Ensure that the FTP Client and SMB port are enabled on the printer. To verify this, print a  
Configuration Report.  
To enable FTP and SMB, see Scan to PC (FTP/SMB) on page 121.  
8. Install and configure the Xerox-certified, third party fax server per the fax management software  
manufacturer's instructions.  
Note: If the fax server will be using TCP/IP to communicate, it is recommended that the server be  
assigned a static IP address.  
Configure a Fax Filing Location (Repository)  
Faxing from the printer to a fax server is very similar to the other methods of faxing available to users  
on the printer. The user simply selects the Fax button from the All Services screen, enters a Recipient  
phone number when prompted, places a document in the document feeder, and presses Start.  
The scanned document is converted into a TIFF file, and a job log is sent along with the image data to  
the fax server.  
The transferred image resides in a directory on the fax server (commonly known as the fax repository).  
The server monitors the repository for documents to be faxed, and faxes any documents it finds per the  
routing instructions contained in the job log. The System Administrator uses a Web browser on any  
networked computer to access the CentreWare Internet Services Web pages, residing on the printer, to  
configure communications with the fax server, and designate the location of the repository on the  
server.  
Protocols available for use in communicating with the fax server include:  
FTP (File Transfer Protocol): Requires an FTP service running on the fax server.  
SMB (Server Message Block): Available for filing to an environment that supports the SMB  
protocol.  
SMTP: Follow the basic instructions for enabling the E-mail ports. See Scan to E-mail on page 100.  
You will need to know the fully qualified domain name of the fax server on your network (e.g.  
SMTP.yournet.net). Also, follow the fax server software manufacturer's instructions to establish fax  
server to email server communications in your network environment.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 155  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
Configure a Fax Filing Repository using FTP  
Installation Checklist  
1. Ensure that a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) service is running on the fax server where images scanned  
by the printer will be stored. Write down the IP address or Host Name.  
2. Create a user account (login name) and password for the printer on the server. When a document is  
scanned, the printer logs in using the account, transfers the file to the server, and logs out. Write  
down the user account (login name) and password.  
3. Following the fax server software manufacturer's instructions, create a directory (repository) on the  
server (likely within the FTP root) to be used as a scan filing location. Write down the directory  
name and path to same.  
4. If allowed by the fax server software manufacturer, test the FTP connection by logging into the  
scan directory from a remote PC using the user account and password. Create a new folder within  
the directory and then delete the folder. If you cannot perform this function, check the user  
account access rights and FTP service setup. You can also wait until you have finished setting up  
device to server communications, as stated in this section, then send a fax to the server to test the  
communications setup.  
Enter the Fax Repository Details in CentreWare Internet Services  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
4. Click the Services folder.  
5. Click the Fax folder.  
6. Click the Fax Repository Setup.  
7. Select FTP for Protocol.  
8. Enter either an IP Address or Host Name for the fax server in the box or boxes provided.  
9. Enter 21 for Port Number (for FTP).  
10. For File Path, type in the name of the folder on the server that has been set up to receive device  
scans. Do not use forward slashes.  
11. Supply the Login Name and Password for the printer to log into the fax server.  
12. Retype the password.  
13. Click Apply.  
14. If prompted, enter the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin  
and 1111.  
156 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Server Fax  
Configure General Settings  
1. Click Defaults.  
2. To print a Confirmation Sheet, select Auto Print On, Auto Print Off, or Print when delivery fails, from  
the drop down menu. Note that the Confirmation Sheet only shows whether data was sent to the  
fax server. It does not show whether the fax was successfully sent by the fax server.  
3. Check the User Name and Domain (Realm) boxes if you want these items to appear on the Job  
Log. The Job Log is filed with the scan job.  
4. Click Apply.  
5. If prompted, enter the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin  
and 1111.  
Configure the Fax Server  
Configure the fax server so that it is able to monitor the fax repository for incoming documents. Refer  
to the fax management software manufacturer's documentation to complete this task.  
Test Faxing through the Server  
1. Go to the printer and press the Services button.  
2. Press the Fax button.  
3. Enter a valid fax number.  
4. Place a document in the document feeder and press the Start button on the control panel.  
5. Verify that the fax was received by the specified fax machine.  
Configure a Fax Filing Repository using SMB  
Installation Checklist  
1. Following the fax server software manufacturer's instructions, create a shared folder on the fax  
server to be used as a scan filing location (repository) for scanned documents. Write down the  
Share Name of the folder and the Computer Name or Server Name.  
2. Create a user account (login name) and password for the printer on the server. Make sure that the  
printer has full access rights to the scan directory. Write down the user account (login name) and  
password.  
3. If allowed by the fax server software manufacturer, test the settings by attempting to connect to  
the shared folder from another PC by logging in with the user account and password. Create a new  
folder within the directory and then delete the folder. If you cannot perform this function check the  
user account access rights and Share setup. Note that you can also simply wait until you have  
finished setting up device to server communications, as stated in this section, then send a fax to  
the server to test the communications setup.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 157  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
Enter the Fax Repository Details via CentreWare Internet Services  
1. At your computer, open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the Address or  
Location field. Press Enter.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Services folder.  
4. Click the Fax folder.  
5. Click Fax Repository Setup and select SMB for Protocol.  
6. Enter an IP Address or Host (NetBIOS) Name and Port.  
7. Enter 139 for Port Number.  
8. Enter Share name and File Path.  
9. For Document Path, type in the name of the folder on the server that has been set up to receive  
device scans. Do not use back slashes.  
10. Supply the Login Name and Password for the printer to log into the fax server.  
11. Enter the password again in the Retype Password box.  
12. Click Apply.  
13. If prompted, enter the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin  
and 1111.  
Configure General Settings  
1. Click Defaults.  
2. To print a Confirmation Sheet, select Auto Print On, Auto Print Off, or Errors Only, from the drop  
down menu. Note that the Confirmation Sheet only shows whether data was sent to the fax server.  
It does not show whether the fax was successfully sent by the fax server.  
3. Check the User Name and Domain Name (Realm) boxes if you want these items to appear on the  
Job Log. The Job Log is filed with the scan job.  
4. Click Apply.  
5. If prompted, enter the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin  
and 1111.  
Configure the Fax Server  
Configure the fax server so that it is able to monitor the fax repository for documents. Refer to the fax  
management software manufacturer's documentation to complete this task.  
Test Faxing through the Server  
1. Go to the printer and press the Services button.  
2. Press the Fax button.  
3. Enter a valid fax number.  
4. Place a document in the document feeder and press the Start button located to the right of the  
control panel's numeric keypad.  
5. Verify that the fax is received by the specified fax machine.  
158 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Server Fax  
Configure a Fax Filing Repository using SMTP  
Installation Checklist  
1. Ensure that the TCP/IP protocol is configured on the printer and is fully functional. To configure  
2. Follow the basic instructions for enabling the E-mail ports. See Scan to E-mail on page 100.  
3. Also, in the Scan to E-mail section, follow the instructions for Configuring E-mail Environment to set  
the Machine E-mail Address. This address will then be displayed in the From field of the Fax.  
4. You will need to know the fully qualified domain name of the fax server on your network (e.g.  
SMTP.yournet.net).  
5. Follow the fax server software manufacturer's instructions to create a directory (repository) on the  
server to be used as a scan filing location.  
6. Follow the fax server software manufacturer's instructions to determine what, if any, additional  
protocols or ports need to be enabled at the printer to support SMTP (email) filing with the server.  
7. Follow the fax server software manufacturer's instructions to establish fax server to email server  
communications in your network environment.  
Enter the Fax Repository Details via CentreWare Internet Services  
1. At your computer, open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the Address or  
Location field. Press Enter.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the Services folder.  
4. Click the Fax folder.  
5. Click Fax Repository Setup and select SMTP for Protocol.  
6. In the Domain Name box, enter the fully qualified domain name of the fax server on your network  
(e.g. SMTP.yournet.net).  
7. For E-mail Address Display Format, choose whether to add FAX= in front of E-mail addressing. If in  
doubt, select Do not add FAX=.  
8. Click Apply.  
9. If prompted, enter the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin  
and 1111.  
Configure General Settings  
1. Click the Defaults.  
2. To print a Confirmation Sheet, select Auto Print On, Auto Print Off, or Error Only, from the drop  
down menu. Note that the Confirmation Sheet only shows whether data was sent to the fax server.  
It does not show whether the fax was successfully sent by the fax server.  
3. Check the User Name and Domain (Realm) boxes if you want these items to appear on the Job  
Log. The Job Log is filed with the scan job.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 159  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
4. Click Apply.  
5. If prompted, enter the administrator User Name and Password and click OK. The default is admin  
and 1111.  
Configure the Fax Server  
Configure the fax server so that it is able to monitor the fax repository for documents. Refer to the fax  
management software manufacturer's documentation to complete this task.  
Test Faxing through the Server  
1. Go to the printer and press the Services button.  
2. Press the Fax button.  
3. Enter a valid email address.  
4. Place a document in the document feeder and press the Start button on the control panel.  
5. Verify that the email was received by the specified recipient.  
Features that Support Server Fax  
Address Book Setup  
Use of this feature enables Fax users to select recipients by 3 digit numbers. Note that a maximum of  
50 characters can be designated for each destination and that only fax destinations can be used. Also  
note that all Address Book information other than Fax Number, Destination Name, and Index  
Character will be ignored. For example, the Extension/Outside line attribute of address book will be  
ignored.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select Setup & Calibration.  
6. Touch Add Address Book Entry.  
7. Select an available Address Number.  
8. Touch Create/Delete.  
9. Touch Address Type, then touch Change Settings.  
10. Touch Fax, then touch Save.  
11. On the the Adddress (Speed Dial) - Fax screen, Enter the Fax number, Name and Index.  
12. Touch Save twice.  
160 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Server Fax  
Group Send  
This setting supports Group Send (broadcast) Fax transmissions to up to 20 address numbers in a pre-  
designated group.  
Note: When Group Send is designated with Server Fax, the group number retained by the server is used  
instead of the group number retained by the printer. You will have to know what group the three digit  
number represents at the server, before selecting its use at the printer's control panel.  
Fax Mode Settings (Screen Defaults and Fax Defaults such as Delayed Start)  
These settings include Screen Defaults and Fax Defaults.  
Screen defaults sets the screen displayed at the printer's control panel when the Fax button is pressed.  
Fax defaults lets you set the parameters for Delayed Start communications. This can be a useful  
feature for saving time-based phone charges. Note that the fax will be immediately sent from the  
printer to the fax server repository, however the server will send the fax at the time designated by this  
feature.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Touch Fax Mode Settings.  
6. Touch Screen Defaults.  
7. Select a Line to enter or change, then touch Change Settings. Touch Save to save any new  
settings.  
Fax Screen Default: Select General Settings or Address Book This will be the Fax service screen  
that users see when they touch the Fax button.  
Address Book Default: Leave this setting at the default of 1, or enter an address book (Fax  
folder) number to display when the Address Book button is touched by users of the Fax service  
screen. Note that the Fax folder needs to be created in advance of this setting.  
8. Touch Close until the Fax Mode Settings selections are again displayed.  
9. Touch Fax Defaults.  
10. Select Delayed Start – Start Time.  
11. Touch Change Settings, make the desired changes, then touch Save.  
12. Touch Close until the Tools screen is displayed.  
13. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
Color Mode, Resolution, File Format, and File Name  
Note that when using Server Fax, these features are set to fixed values which cannot be changed. The  
setting for Color Mode is Monochrome. The setting for Resolution is Fine, and the setting for File  
Format is TIFF. In addition, the Server Fax feature also automatically assigns file names.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 161  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
Internet Fax (iFAX)  
Overview  
When the iFAX feature is enabled, the printer can transmit scanned data as an e-mail attachment  
using either corporate networks or the Internet, unlike conventional fax machines which utilize public  
phone lines. Also, the printer can receive e-mails transmitted from other machines which support the  
iFAX service. When the printer receives e-mail from an iFAX-compatible machine, the received  
document is printed automatically.  
Note: It is assumed that you purchased the Internet Fax option to enable iFAX with your printer. If you  
did not, contact your Xerox Representative to purchase this option.  
Note: The FAX or Internet Fax (iFAX) features and the Server Fax feature are mutually exclusive. If  
Server Fax is enabled, even if the printer is equipped with an internal fax board, scanning to the internal  
FAX will be disabled. While the Server Fax feature is enabled, the iFAX service will also be disabled. Also  
note that Folder to FAX (a Job Flow Sheet destination) and Direct Fax (LAN Fax) are not supported  
when Server Fax is enabled. The default when both options have been installed is to enable the internal  
fax board and Internet Fax. Server Fax will be disabled. You can use CentreWare Internet Services to  
select which Fax Service to enable. For more information see Server Fax on page 154.  
System Requirements  
Internet Fax kit  
The printer is connected to the network and communication through TCP/IP is available.  
The environment is prepared for e-mail exchange.  
Installation Procedure  
The configuration procedure to use the iFAX feature on the printer is comprised of the following steps.  
1. Enable the ports which are used for the iFAX feature, and set an IP address of the printer.  
2. Configure the items for the iFAX feature on the printer.  
Note: The configuration can also be performed using CentreWare Internet Services. For more  
162 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Internet Fax (iFAX)  
Enabling the E-mail Ports and Setting TCP/IP  
First enable the ports for the e-mail feature, then set the IP address. The procedure for setting the  
printer is as follows.  
Note: First enable the E-mail port, then set the IP address.  
Note: The configuration can also be performed using CentreWare Internet Services. For more  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select System Settings.  
6. Select Connectivity & Network Setup.  
7. Select Port Settings.  
8. On the Port Settings screen, select Receive E-mail and then select Change Settings.  
9. On the Receive E-Mail screen, select Port Status and select Change Settings.  
10. On the Receive E-Mail Port Status screen, select Enabled, then select Save.  
11. Select Close until the Port Settings screen is displayed.  
12. On the Port Settings screen, select Send E-Mail, and then select Change Settings.  
13. On the Send E-Mail screen, select Port Status and select Change Settings.  
14. On the Send E-Mail Port Status screen, select Enabled then select Save.  
15. Select Close until the Tools screen is displayed.  
16. Set the IP address.  
If an IP address is already set, this step is not necessary. Also, in an environment with DHCP or  
BOOTP, configure the way to obtain an IP address. If the address cannot be obtained  
automatically or static configuration is preferred, configure an IP address, a subnet mask, and a  
gateway address as stated below.  
a. Select Protocol Settings.  
b. Select IPv4 (or other mode) Address Resolution and then select Change Settings.  
c. Select one from DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, DHCP/Autonet or Static and then select Save. If you  
select anything other than Static, proceed to Step 4.  
Note: When using a DHCP server, also configure the DNS, or WINS (Windows Internet Name Service)  
server (WINS for SMB support) in CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, see CentreWare  
d. On the Protocol Settings screen, select TCP/IP - IP Address and select Change Settings.  
e. Enter the IP address using the numeric keypad.  
Note: Enter address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The xxx should be a numeric value in the range from  
0 to 255. However, 224 – 255.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be used.  
f. Select Save.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 163  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
g. Configure TCP/IP - Subnet Mask and TCP/IP - Gateway Address.  
Note: Enter the Gateway address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The xxx should be a numeric value in  
the range from 0 to 255. However, 224 – 255.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be used.  
Note: Specify the subnet mask by a combination of the numbers 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254,  
and 255. However, you cannot use 0 between non-zero values.  
Note: If you do not set the gateway address, enter 0.0.0.0.  
17. Select Close until the Tools screen is displayed.  
18. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
19. If you changed any settings, the printer will automatically reboot to register and enable your new  
settings. After the printer is restarted, print out a Configuration Report to confirm that the ports are  
enabled and TCP/IP is correctly configured. For information on how to print a Configuration Report,  
Configuring the E-mail Environment  
Note: The configuration can also be performed using CentreWare Internet Services. For more  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select Connectivity & Network Setup.  
6. Select Machine E-mail Address/Host Name.  
7. Select E-mail Address and then select Change Settings.  
8. Enter an E-mail address using the displayed keyboard.  
9. Select Save.  
10. Set a host name and a domain name as above.  
11. Select Close.  
If SMTP has been selected for the Mail Receiving Protocol  
Aliases cannot be configured. A user can decide an account name (the left side of the @ mark). An  
address (the right side of the@ mark) is a combination of a host name and a domain name.  
Example: [email protected]  
Account name: mymail  
Host name: myhost  
Domain name: example.com  
If POP3 has been selected for the Mail Receiving Protocol  
Specify a POP user name to an account name (the left side of the @ mark), and a POP3 receiving  
mail server to an address (the right side of the @ mark). A user can decide an alias such as  
Example: [email protected]  
164 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Internet Fax (iFAX)  
Account name: mymail  
12. Set the protocol for receiving E-mail.  
a. From the Connectivity & Network Setup list, select Other Settings.  
b. Select E-mail Receive Protocol and then select Change Settings.  
c. Select either SMTP or POP3 as appropriate for your environment.  
d. Select Save.  
e. Select Close.  
If POP3 has been selected for the Mail Receiving Protocol  
f. From the Connectivity & Network Setup list, select Outgoing/Incoming (i.e. E-mail  
Send/Receive Settings).  
g. Select POP3 Server Settings and then set the following items for the POP3 server.  
POP3 Server Name/Address  
h. Enter the POP3 Server Name/IP Address and press Save.  
Note: Enter the address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The xxx should be a numeric value in the range  
from 0 to 255. However, 224 – 255.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be used.  
POP3 Server Port Number  
Enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535. The default is 110. Do not use the numbers of any  
other ports.  
Polling Interval  
Set the interval for checking the e-mail on the POP3 server.  
Login Name  
Enter the name to log in to the POP3 server and press Save.  
Password  
Enter the same password twice in the New Password and Re-enter Password. If you do not set the  
password, leave it blank and select Save.  
POP3 Password Encryption  
Select On (APOP) to encrypt the password, if desired.  
a. Select Save.  
b. Select Close.  
13. Set the protocol for sending E-mail.  
a. From the Connectivity & Network Setup list, select Outgoing/Incoming, then select SMTP  
Server Settings, and then set the following items for the SMTP server.  
SMTP Server Name/Address  
Enter the SMTP Server Name/IP Address and press Save.  
Note: Enter the address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The xxx should be a numeric value in the range  
from 0 to 255. However, 224 – 255.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be used.  
SMTP Server Port Number  
Enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535. The default is 25.  
Note: This configuration is not necessary if SMTP has been selected for the Mail Receiving Protocol and  
has already been configured.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 165  
System Administrator Guide  
Scanning and Faxing  
E-mail Send Authentication  
Select one from Off, POP before SMTP, or SMTP AUTH. If you are having trouble sending E-mail,  
to see if Authentication is the problem, set this item to Off and set the SMTP Server IP Address  
(above) to a server that does not require authentication.  
Note: If POP before SMTP is selected, the POP3 settings must be set.  
SMTP AUTH Login Name  
Set this item if SMTP AUTH is selected for E-mail Send Authentication.  
SMTP AUTH Password  
Set this item if SMTP AUTH is selected for E-mail Send Authentication. Enter the same password  
twice in the New Password and Re-enter Password. If you do not set the password, leave it blank  
and select Save.  
b. Select Close until the Connectivity & Network Setup list is again displayed.  
Login Credentials for Sending Email  
14. Select from System or Remotely Authenticated user. If Remotely Authenticated User is selected,  
the authenticated user details will be used for authentication of outgoing emails. (Remote  
Authentication must be configured). If system is selected, the Login Name and Password specified  
for System will always be used for authentication of outgoing emails.  
15. Setting S/MIME Security (optional)  
a. From the Connectivity & Network Setup list, select Security Settings. If the selection is not  
visible, use the scrolling arrow to display it.  
b. Select S/MIME Settings and set the following items:  
Device Certificate - S/MIME: Link a certificate to the printer. You must have an S/MIME  
certificate on the printer to perform encryption. For information on S/MIME certificates, see  
S/MIME Communication: Set whether to enable or disable S/MIME Communication when a  
certificate ID is set.  
Receive Untrusted E-mail: Set whether to receive untrusted E-mail or not.  
Receive Untrusted iFAX: Set whether to receive untrusted iFAX or not.  
Message Digest Algorithm: Select a message digest algorithm from SHA1 or MD5.  
Message Encryption Method: Select a contents encryption method from 3DES, RC2-40, RC2-  
64, or RC2-128.  
Digital Signature – Outgoing E-mail: Set whether to always attach a digital signature to E-  
mail or to select a digital signature when sending E-mail.  
Digital Signature – Outgoing iFAX: Set whether to always attach a digital signature to iFAX or  
to select a digital signature when sending iFAX.  
Certificate Auto Store: Select whether or not to automatically store a S/MIME certificate  
attached with the E-mail when receiving E-mail sent from an address registered in the address  
book.  
16. Select Close repeatedly until the Tools screen is displayed.  
17. Wait several seconds for the Auto Clear service to log you out.  
18. After the printer is restarted, print a Configuration Report to confirm that each item is configured.  
For information on how to print a Configuration Report, see Configuration Report on page 22.  
166 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Internet Fax (iFAX)  
Testing iFAX  
Sending From the Printer to Another iFAX-capable Machine  
1. Test the iFAX transmission from the printer.  
2. Press the Services button, then touch the Internet Fax button.  
3. Select New Recipient, then the To button, in the Recipient’s drop down list.  
4. Enter the destination address, using the displayed keyboard.  
5. Touch the Add button, then touch Close.  
6. Place your document in the document feeder and press the Start button located to the immediate  
right of the control panel’s numeric keypad.  
7. Check to see if the other machine printed the incoming iFAX.  
Note: To set up the address book for use with LDAP (network search), see LDAP Authentication on  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 167  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Scanning and Faxing  
168 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Printer Management  
Xerox Standard Accounting  
Overview  
When enabled, Xerox Standard Accounting (XSA) tracks the numbers of Copy, Print, Network Scanning,  
E-mail, Server Fax, Internet Fax and Embedded Fax jobs (when these features are installed on the  
printer), for each user. Usage limits can also be applied to users to restrict the total numbers of copy,  
print, fax and scan jobs that a user can perform. Administrators can print a report which contains all  
XSA data.  
XSA is set up through CentreWare Internet Services. Administrators must create accounts and specify  
limits before users are authorized to access the printer.  
When XSA is set up, users must enter their account details at the printer to use the printer. When they  
have finished their job, their XSA allocation is reduced by the number of prints, copies or scans  
performed. When XSA is enabled, users must enter their account details in the printer driver to print  
documents from their computers.  
The XSA feature is mutually exclusive from any other accounting feature. If XSA is enabled at the  
printer, you cannot enable Foreign printer Interface, Auditron or Network Accounting.  
Each device supports unique XSA User IDs and Group Accounts.  
All user IDs must be assigned to one or more group accounts.  
Note: The XSA settings and account data are stored in the printer. It is strongly recommended that you  
back up the settings and data regularly using the Cloning available under the XSA folder of CentreWare  
Internet Services as described in this section. Should the printer lose your XSA data and settings you  
can restore them from the backup file that you produced by the Cloning process.  
Installation Checklist  
Before starting the installation procedure, please ensure the following items are available or have been  
performed.  
1. Ensure that your device is fully functioning on the network.  
2. Ensure that the TCP/IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the printer and fully functioning. This  
is required to access CentreWare Internet Services to configure Xerox Standard Accounting.  
To verify that the TCP/IP and HTTP protocols are correctly configured, print a Configuration Report. For  
To configure TCP/IP, see TCP/IP Protocol Configuration on page 43.  
170 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Xerox Standard Accounting  
Enabling Xerox Standard Accounting  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
4. Select the Accounting folder, then click Accounting Configuration.  
5. Select Xerox Standard Accounting from the Accounting Type drop down list.  
Note: It is also possible to select Xerox Accounting for use with an Authentication Server. See Secure  
6. Click Apply, then Reboot Machine.  
7. Navigate back to the same page and click Next.  
8. Under Device Default State Configuration, click Configure next to Service Access.  
9. Select one of the following for each service you want to control:  
Unlocked: Allow unrestricted access.  
Locked (Show Icon): Require login for access. The service icon is visible to all users in the all  
services screen.  
Locked (Hide Icon): Require login for access. The service icon is hidden until an authorized user  
logs in.  
10. Click Apply and enter the Administrator User name and password when prompted (default of  
admin and 1111).  
11. Click OK., then click Reboot Machine.  
Create a Group Account  
1. On the Properties tab of CentreWare Internet Services, click the Accounting folder, then the Xerox  
Standard Accounting folder.  
2. Click Group Accounts to create a new group account.  
3. In the Group Accounts Account ID box, enter an ID for the new group account (for example 001).  
The Group Account can be numeric values up to a maximum of 32 characters. Group Account ID's  
must be unique.  
4. Enter a name for the group account in the Account Name box (for example Xerox). The group  
name can be alphanumeric characters to a maximum of 32 characters. The Group Account name  
must be unique.  
5. Click Apply. The account will now be available in the Group Accounts list. Refresh your browser,  
then click Group Accounts again to see the new group.  
Create a User Account and Set Usage Limits  
Note: At least one group account must be created before you create user accounts.  
1. On the Properties tab of CentreWare Internet Services, click the Accounting folder, then the Xerox  
Standard Accounting folder in the directory tree.  
2. Click Manage Accounting.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 171  
System Administrator Guide  
       
Printer Management  
3. Click the Add New User button.  
4. Enter an ID for the user. The user ID can contain alphanumeric characters to a maximum of 32  
characters (for example: A10). User ID's must be unique.  
5. Enter the user name (for example Jane Smith). The user name can contain alphanumeric  
characters to a maximum of 32 characters. User names must be unique.  
6. Enter a passcode in the Passcode box.  
7. Specify the usage limits for this account in the User Limits boxes. The maximum value for each  
limit is 9999999.  
8. Click Apply when you have finished setting the usage limits.  
Maximum Usage Limits and Resetting Individual Usage Limits  
The first time a user logs into the printer after they have reached their maximum usage limit, a  
message displays on the touch screen. The message notifies the user that they have reached their limit  
for the feature. Users will not be unable to use the feature until their limit is reset.  
If the user performs a copy job at the printer, and mid way through the job their limit is exceeded, the  
job will not continue.  
If the user performs a scan job at the printer, and mid way through the job their limit is exceeded, the  
job will be cancelled.  
If the user's limit is reached before a print job is completed, the printer will notify the user that their  
limit has been reached. The job will be deleted from the print queue. The job may run over due to  
sheets committed to the paper path.  
Note: The system administrator has unlimited access to the printer.  
To Reset User Limits  
1. On the Properties tab of CentreWare Internet Services, click the Accounting folder, then the Xerox  
Standard Accounting folder in the directory tree.  
2. Click Manage Accounting.  
3. Place a checkmark in the box for the desired User ID.  
4. Click Limits and Access.  
5. Enter the new User Limits, check the Reset box, and click Apply.  
Using XSA at the printer  
When you enable XSA, users must enter a valid user name at the printer to access any services to which  
access restriction has been applied. Refer to Enable Xerox Standard Accounting in this section for the  
specific service restricting procedure.  
At the Printer  
1. Press the Services button, if necessary, to display all the available service buttons.  
2. Press any button representing a service to which restricted access has been applied.  
172 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
Xerox Standard Accounting  
3. When the Press the Log In/Out button message displays on screen, press the Log In/Out button.  
4. Enter a User ID and touch Confirm.  
Note: If the User is a member of more than one Group Account, he or she will be asked to select the  
account that they wish to log into.  
5. When the User is logged in, the selected service screen will be displayed. The User can now use that  
service, with usage tracked by XSA.  
Resetting Usage Data  
At your Computer  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Accounting folder, then the Xerox Standard Accounting folder in the directory tree.  
5. Click the Report and Reset.  
6. To reset all usage data to zero, click the Reset Usage Data button.  
7. Click OK to confirm.  
Warning: Do not click Reset to Default unless you intend to delete all users, accounts and usage data  
from your machine.  
Print a Usage Report  
At your Computer  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Accounting folder, then the Xerox Standard Accounting folder in the directory tree.  
5. Click the Report and Reset.  
6. Click the Generate Report button.  
7. Follow any additional displayed prompts to save the XSA Report.csv (comma separated value) file  
to your computer.  
Enable XSA in your Print Drivers  
Refer to the driver documentation for the steps to follow to enable XSA in your print drivers.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 173  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Printer Management  
Backing Up XSA Data and Settings and Cloning to Another Device  
The Cloning feature enables you to copy/backup settings, including Xerox Standard Accounting (XSA)  
settings and account information, to a file on your computer or Server. Cloning will create a .dat file  
that can be used to restore the data and settings on the same machine or to clone the settings to other  
machines. Both the source and target machines must have the same version of software for the .dat  
file to be accepted. The software version is located on the Properties tab, under General Setup.  
Settings available for cloning are:  
Connectivity settings  
E-Mail settings  
Internet Fax settings  
Job Management settings  
Authentication settings  
Fax settings  
Network Scanning Settings  
Network Scanning Templates  
Audit Log settings  
To clone / backup a machine’s settings  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Click the General Setup folder, then Cloning.  
4. In the Cloning area, in the Create Clone File box, select the settings that you wish to clone.  
To see a detailed listing of the settings that will be cloned, click View Feature Details  
To clone all features, verify that all features are checked and then click Clone.  
To customize the configuration file, disable any of the features by clearing the check boxes  
next to the feature(s), then click Clone.  
5. Enter the current administrator User name and password, if prompted. The default is admin and  
1111.  
6. Right click the .dat link that appears and select Save Target As.  
7. A dialog box will prompt you to specify and name and location for the cloned file. Ensure the  
extension reads .dat.  
8. Click Save. The .dat file can now be used to restore the information to the same machine or to  
clone other machines.  
174 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Xerox Standard Accounting  
To Restore Settings or Clone Settings to another Machine  
This procedure will cause the machine to reboot and will be unavailable over the network for several  
minutes.  
Note: All machines must have the same version of software for the .dat file to be accepted  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the General Setup folder, then Cloning.  
5. In the Cloning area, in the Install Clone File box:  
6. Click Browse and move through your file system to the .dat file.  
7. Click Open.  
8. Click Install.  
9. If prompted, enter the current administrator User name and password. The default is admin and  
1111.  
10. The machine will be unavailable over the network for several minutes.  
Once rebooted a Configuration Report should automatically print, if enabled. If the Configuration  
Report does not automatically print, manually print the Configuration Report. For more information  
Looking at the Configuration Report, verify that some or all of your settings have been cloned to the  
new machine. Also, note that it may be necessary for you to use your Web browser to view the Xerox  
Standard Accounting set up of Users and Groups on the new machine.  
Audit Log  
With TCP/IP and HTTP-based processes running on the printer, exposure to access attacks,  
eavesdropping, file tampering, service disruption, and identity (password) theft is significantly  
increased.  
The Audit Log, regularly reviewed by the Security Administrator, often with the aid of third party  
analyzing tools, helps to assess attempted security breaches, identify actual breaches, and prevent  
future breaches.  
The Audit Log is enabled or disabled from the Audit Log on the Properties tab of CentreWare Internet  
Services, accessed from a networked computer running a Web browser. Access to logged data is also  
accomplished from the Audit Log on the Properties tab of CentreWare Internet Services, but  
additionally requires the enabling of SSL/TLS encryption. For more information see Configuration of  
Events tracked in the Audit Log, include: Starting and Stopping of the printer, Login/Logout events,  
Changes to system settings, and job completions.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 175  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Printer Management  
Accessing the Audit Log feature  
The Audit Log feature is accessed through CentreWare Internet Services as follows:  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. Enter the system administrator User Name and Password (default admin, 1111) if prompted.  
4. Click the Audit Log.  
5. Supply the Administrator User Name and Password (defaults of admin and 1111), when  
prompted.  
176 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Annotation (Bates Stamping)  
Annotation (Bates Stamping)  
Overview  
Adding notes to scanned and copied pages (annotation) is primarily a user-controlled feature. Bates  
Stamping is used in the legal profession to sequentially number or date/time-mark documents as they  
are scanned and copied by the system. A number of parameters are available for selection, as specified  
below.  
Note: Other forms of annotation are available, with default parameters set by the System  
Administrator using the same button-pressing sequence stated in this section under Configuring a  
precise bates stamp location. For these other forms of annotation, note that you will need to press the  
Copy Defaults button, after pressing Copy Service Settings on the Tools tab, to modify stamp  
settings.  
Configuring Bates Stamp Settings  
1. Insert a document in the printer's document feeder.  
2. Press Copy on the Main (All Services) screen.  
3. Press the Output Format tab.  
4. Press the Annotations button.  
5. Select Bates Stamp.  
6. Set Bates Stamping to On.  
7. Press the Prefix text box, and press Edit if necessary, to use the displayed keyboard to specify the  
Prefix to use.  
8. Press Save.  
9. Press the Number of Digits button to assign the number of digits for printed page numbers. Press  
Save to save setting changes.  
10. Press Apply To in order to specify the pages on which to print the Bates Stamp. Press Save to save  
changes.  
11. Press Position to specify the relative position on the page for the printed Bates Stamp. Note that, if  
available, a precise location can be set by the System Administrator. Press Save to save changes.  
12. Press Format & Style to specify the size and color of type for the Bates Stamp. Press Save to save  
changes.  
13. Press Save when done, then press Save again.  
14. Press the Start button.  
Configuring a Precise Bates Stamp Location  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 177  
System Administrator Guide  
       
Printer Management  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Press Copy Service Settings.  
6. Press Copy Control.  
7. Press the down arrow to scroll to the Bates Stamping selection lines.  
8. Press the applicable Bates Stamp position lines to set the precise location for your Bates stamp,  
using x and y axes.  
9. Press Change Settings to change settings.  
10. Press Save to save your changes.  
11. Press Close until the System Settings screen is displayed.  
12. Press Exit on the System Settings screen to return to the Main (All Services) screen.  
178 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
Media Card Reader  
Media Card Reader  
The Media Card Reader is available as an optional kit. After the Media Card Reader is installed, you can  
print digital camera image data (Exif), and documents (PDF, TIFF) stored on the media card.  
For more information, refer to the Media Card Reader User Guide.  
Note: Exif is a file format that embeds information required to print data in an image taken by digital  
cameras.  
The printer uses two media printing modes:  
Media Print – Text: Prints data stored in document format. It is helpful to think of the word text as  
synonymous with document.  
Media Print – Photos: Prints data stored in the standard format of most digital cameras.  
Media Card Reader Hardware  
Access Indicator: This light illuminates when the media card is inserted.  
Eject Button: Press this button to eject the media card.  
Media Slot: Insert the media card into this slot.  
Supported Media and File Formats  
The Media Card Reader supports CompactFlash media only. To use media other than CompactFlash,  
insert the media into a CompactFlash adaptor.  
Note: The media and the CompactFlash adaptor are optional.  
The media and file formats that can be used are as follows.  
Supported Media  
SmartMedia  
CompactFlash  
CompactFlash (MicroDrive)  
SD Card  
Memory Stick  
xD-Picture Card  
Supported File Formats  
Media Print – Photos  
JPEG  
TIFF: DCF1.0-compliant JPEG/TIFF (Exif2.0, Exif2.1, Exif2.2)  
Media Print – Text  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 179  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Printer Management  
PDF: .pdf, PDF1.3 or later  
TIFF: .tif, gray scale 4 bit/8 bit uncompressed, 4 bit/24 bit compressed by JPEG, compressed by  
MH/MMR  
Important Notes and Restrictions  
MagicGate Memory Stick is not supported.  
Image files other than files in Exif format (JPEG and TIFF files created on computers) cannot be  
printed.  
If an image file in Exif format is edited or saved on a computer, the file format is changed and no  
longer remains in Exif format.  
Do not save image files and document files in the same medium.  
A media card containing over 900 files may not be detected properly.  
In Media Print – Text mode, PDF files or TIFF files stored in folders cannot be printed.  
PDF files stored on Mac OS cannot be printed and displayed on the screen.  
If characters not supported by the printer are used in file names, the file names will not be  
displayed on the screen.  
Characters up to 255 can be recognized as a file name. However, not more than 100 characters will  
be displayed.  
Use media formatted by digital cameras or computers (FAT12, 16, 32 only).  
Only use media recommended by Xerox. For the information on recommended media, contact our  
Customer Support Center.  
If anything is wrong with a media card, the process aborts within a few minutes and an error  
message appears.  
Before turning the printer Off, be sure to eject the media card.  
Inserting and Ejecting Media  
Caution: Do not press the Eject Button, pull out the USB cable, or power off the printer when the  
Access Indicator light is illuminated. Data stored on the media card may be damaged.  
1. Before ejecting the medium, touch the antistatic label.  
2. Press the Eject button, and then pull out the media card.  
Selecting and Printing Text Files  
1. Insert the media card into the Media Slot of the Media Card Reader.  
2. Press the Services button.  
3. Touch the Media Print – Text icon.  
4. After the files are imported, touch the appropriate button. You can choose from:  
Select All  
Select from List  
Select Range  
180 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Media Card Reader  
5. Touch the Media Print Text and Advanced Settings tabs as required to change any appropriate  
print settings.  
6. Press the Start button.  
Media Print Text Tab  
The Media Print Text tab allows you to select from a variety of printing options.  
The options for the Media Print Text tab include:  
Output Color: Color or Black & White.  
Paper Supply: Choose the paper tray to be used as a source when printing.  
2-sided Printing: Choose 1-sided, 2-sided (Flip on long edge), or 2-sided (Flip on short edge).  
Multiple-Up: Choose from Off, 2 Pages Up, or 4 Pages Up.  
Index Print  
The Index Print button allows you to print a collection of miniature (30mm x 40mm) images onto one  
page from the files on the media card.  
When you select the Index Print button, you will only be able to specify the number of copies printed.  
All other printing options remain at their previous settings.  
Advanced Settings  
The Advanced Settings tab allows you to select from a variety of printing options.  
You can choose to set Bitmap Smoothing to On or Off on this tab. Selecting the On option smoothes  
out rough and jagged edges within your document.  
Selecting and Printing Photo Files  
1. Insert the media card into the Media Slot of the Media Card Reader.  
2. Press the Services button.  
3. Touch the Media Print – Photos icon.  
4. After the files are imported, touch the appropriate button. You can choose from:  
Select All  
Select from List  
Select Range  
5. Touch the Media Print Photos and Advanced Settings tabs as required to change any appropriate  
print settings.  
6. Press the Start button.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 181  
System Administrator Guide  
       
Printer Management  
Media Print Photos Tab  
The Media Print Photos tab allows you to select from a variety of printing options. The Media Print  
Photos tab is shown below. The options for the Media Print Photos tab include:  
Output Color: Color or Black & White.  
Paper Supply: Choose the paper tray to be used as a source when printing.  
2-sided Printing: Choose 1-sided, 2-sided (Flip on long edge), or 2-sided (Flip on short edge).  
Output Photo Size: Choose from Full Page Print, any available Output Size, or anywhere from 2  
to 8 Pictures per Page.  
Index Print  
The Index Print button allows you to print a collection of miniature (30mm x 40mm) images onto one  
page from the files on the media card. When you select the Index Print button, you will only be able to  
specify the number of copies printed. All other printing options remain at their previous settings.  
Advanced Settings  
The Advanced Settings tab allows you to select from a variety of printing options.  
You can choose to set Bitmap Smoothing to On or Off on this tab. Selecting the On option smoothes  
out rough and jagged edges within your document.  
Problem Solving  
If one of the following symptoms occurs, or if an error message appears on the screen, follow the  
remedy to solve the problem.  
Symptom 1: The access indicator light of the Media Card Reader does not illuminate.  
Cause: The USB cable may not be connected correctly.  
Remedy: Turn the printer off, unplug the USB cable, and then insert the cable into the  
connector securely.  
Symptom 2: The Media Print - Photos and Media Print - Text icons are not displayed on the All Services  
screen.  
Cause: The printer does not recognize the media card reader properly.  
Remedy: Power off the printer, pull out the USB cable, and then insert the cable into the  
connector securely.  
182 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Media Card Reader  
Symptom 3: Blank sheets are output.  
Cause: Files that cannot be printed by the printer (image files not saved in Exif format) are  
included in the selected files.  
Remedy: Image files not saved in Exif format cannot be printed by Index Print. Delete the  
image files that cannot be printed by Index Print, and then print files again.  
Note: If an image file in Exif format is edited or saved on a computer, the file format is changed and no  
longer remains in Exif format.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 183  
System Administrator Guide  
Printer Management  
USB Printing  
Overview  
The USB Printing option is available as a kit for the XOG Template Usage Guidelines printer.  
If the Media Card Reader is installed, Exif image data from digital cameras and document files (PDF,  
TIFF) can be printed.  
Note: Exif is a file format that embeds information required to print data in an image taken by digital  
cameras. If an image file in Exif format is edited or saved on a computer, the file format is changed  
and no longer remains in Exif format.  
The printer uses two media printing modes:  
Media Print – Text: Prints data stored in document format. It is helpful to think of the word text as  
synonymous with document.  
Media Print – Photos: Prints data stored in the standard format of most digital cameras.  
Note: The USB Printing option is similar to the Media Card Reader option, but there are several  
important differences.  
Supported Media and File Formats  
USB Printing supports typical USB flash drives.  
Supported File Formats  
Media Print - Text  
PDF: PDF1.3 or later  
TIFF: gray scale 4 bit/8 bit uncompressed, 4 bit/24 bit compressed by JPEG, compressed by  
MH/MMR  
XPS  
Media Print - Photos  
JPEG  
TIFF - DCF1.0-compliant JPEG/TIFF (Exif2.0, Exif2.1, Exif2.2)  
Note: The photo files must be in the format that they were stored in on the camera. Copy the folder,  
(for instance, a DCIM folder) to the USB drive.  
184 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
     
USB Printing  
Important Notes and Restrictions  
Image files other than files in Exif format (JPEG and TIFF files created on computers) cannot be  
printed.  
If an image file in Exif format is edited or saved on a computer, the file format is changed and no  
longer remains in Exif format.  
Do not save image files and document files in the same medium.  
In Media Print - Text mode, PDF files or TIFF files stored in folders cannot be printed.  
PDF files stored on Mac OS cannot be printed and displayed on the screen.  
If characters not supported by the printer are used in file names, the file names will not be  
displayed on the screen.  
Characters up to 255 can be recognized as a file name. However, not more than 100 characters will  
be displayed.  
Selecting and Printing Text Files  
1. Insert the USB drive into the USB slot.  
2. Press the Services button.  
3. Touch the Media Print – Text icon.  
4. After the files are imported, touch the appropriate button. You can choose from:  
Select All  
Select From List  
Select Range  
5. Touch the Media Print Text or Advanced Settings tabs as required to change any appropriate  
print settings.  
6. Touch the file to be printed.  
7. Press the Start button.  
Media Print Text Tab  
The Media Print Text tab allows you to select from a variety of printing options.  
The options for the Media Print Text tab include:  
Output Color: Color or Black & White.  
Paper Supply: Choose the paper tray to be used as a source when printing.  
2-sided Printing: Choose 1-sided, 2-sided (Flip on long edge), or 2-sided (Flip on short edge).  
Output: Choose stapling options as needed.  
Index Print: The Index Print button allows you to print a collection of miniature (30mm x 40mm)  
images onto one page from the files on the media card. When you select the Index Print button,  
you will only be able to specify the number of copies printed. All other printing options remain at  
their previous settings.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 185  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Printer Management  
Advanced Settings Tab  
The Advanced Settings tab allows you to select from a variety of printing options.  
Multiple-Up: Choose from Off, 2 Pages Up, or 4 Pages Up.  
Bitmap Smoothing : Smoothes out rough and jagged edges within your document.  
Selecting and Printing Photo Files  
Note: The photo files must be in the format that they were stored in on the camera. Copy the folder,  
(for instance, a DCIM folder) to the USB drive.  
Insert the USB drive into the USB slot.  
1. Press the Services button.  
2. Touch the Media Print – Photos icon.  
3. After the files are imported, touch the appropriate button. You can choose from:  
Select All  
Select From List  
Select Range  
4. Touch the Media Print Photos or Advanced Settings tabs as required to change any appropriate  
print settings.  
5. Touch the file to be printed.  
6. Press the Start button.  
Media Print Photos Tab  
The Media Print Photos tab allows you to select from a variety of printing options. The Media Print  
Photos tab is shown below. The options for the Media Print Photos tab include:  
Output Color: Color or Black & White.  
Paper Supply: Choose the paper tray to be used as a source when printing.  
2-sided Printing: Choose 1-sided, 2-sided (Flip on long edge), or 2-sided (Flip on short edge).  
Output Photo Size: Choose from Full Page Print, any available Output Size, or anywhere from 2  
to 8 Pictures per Page.  
Index Print: The Index Print button allows you to print a collection of miniature (30mm x  
40mm) images onto one page from the files on the media card. When you select the Index  
Print button, you will only be able to specify the number of copies printed. All other printing  
options remain at their previous settings.  
Advanced Settings Tab  
The Advanced Settings tab allows you to select from a variety of printing options.  
You can choose to set Bitmap Smoothing to On or Off on this tab. Selecting the On option smoothes  
out rough and jagged dges within your document.  
186 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Thumbnail Preview  
Thumbnail Preview  
Thumbnail Preview is an optional feature and may not be available on your machine. Review the  
instructions that are included in the Thumbnail kit.  
To view a thumbnail preview and print a document  
1. Press the Services button on the printer’s control panel.  
2. Touch Send from Folder.  
3. Select Folder Name. A list of Folder Names are displayed with a number association. The numbers  
are used as identifiers for commonly used folders. You may identify the folder by the name or  
number, depending on how you choose to identify the folder.  
4. Select the document name from the Document List. The document selected will be used to send to  
the printer. When a document is identified and selected, a check mark will be placed in the Order  
field. More than one document can be selected.  
5. In the Folder, a document to be previewed may be any print, scan, or fax job On a thumb drive, a  
document may only be a JPEG in the Exchangeable image file format (Exif). Exif JPEGS are JPEGs  
as they are stored on a digital camera. A JPEG produced by Photoshop or any other image  
modification and storage software will not work properly.  
6. Select Thumbnail. The Thumbnail feature will open a preview window of the selected document. A  
small, thumbnail-sized image will display on your screen. This option is useful in determining if you  
have chosen the correct document.  
7. Select Print.  
8. The folder print settings will display.  
9. Select the Paper Supply, Output, and 2-sided Printing Options.  
10. Select Print.  
11. The selected document will be printed to the specified location.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 187  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Printer Management  
Hard Disk Data Encryption  
The controller hard disk data encryption is enabled by default on your printer. This encryption feature  
provides an additional level of data security on the printer, while operating at a low level within the  
operating system. The impact on performance is very small.  
Enabling or disabling disk encryption will result in a system reboot and a hard disk initialization. During  
hard disk initialization, all customer information, folders, templates, and other information stored on  
the disk will be lost.  
To Verify or Change Hard Disk Data Encryption  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Touch Common Service Settings.  
6. Scroll to Other Settings.  
7. Touch Data Encryption, and touch Change Settings. Touch On, then touch Save.  
Enabling or disabling disk encryption will result in a system reboot and a hard disk initialization. During  
hard disk initialization, all customer information, folders, templates, and other data stored on the disk  
will be lost.  
Encryption Key For Confidential Data  
When enabling Data Encryption, the system administrator may also create an Encryption Key For  
Confidential Data. The system administrator may either verify the default encryption key, or enter a  
new alpha-numeric string of up to 12 characters to be used by the encryption algorithm.  
188 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Xerox Smart eSolutions  
Xerox Smart eSolutions  
To enable the printer for Automated Meter Reading and Supplies Replenishment:  
Enable communications with the Xerox Smart eSolutions Server  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
4. Click the Services folder, then theXerox Services Folder  
5. Click theXerox Communication Server  
6. In the Communication Setup area, check the Server Communication check box  
7. Set the transmission time for a time when the printer will most likely be turned on during the day  
8. Click Apply.  
Set up the Internet Proxy Server (optional)  
1. Click the Properties tab.  
2. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols folder.  
3. Click Proxy Server.  
4. In the General area, select the User Proxy Server check box, click Enabled  
5. If you have selected Same Proxy for all Protocols for Proxy Setup, you must enter the Internet  
Proxy address in the HTTP section.  
6. If you have selected Different Proxy for Each Protocol, be sure to enter the Internet Proxy address  
in the HTTPS section.  
7. Click Apply.  
Configure DNS  
1. Click the Properties tab.  
2. Click the Connectivity folder and select the Protocols folder then selectTCP/IP.  
3. In the DNS Configuration section select Obtain DNS Server Address Automatically, or manually  
enter the DNS Server address information (when using STATIC, BOOTP, or RARP IP address  
resolution).  
4. Click Apply.  
5. You may be prompted to reboot the printer.  
Validate that your Printer has been Registered for Smart eSolutions  
1. Click the Properties tab.  
2. Click the Services folder, then the Xerox Services folder.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 189  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Printer Management  
3. Click Xerox Communication Server  
4. In the Communication Log area check for the word Success or Fail in the message.  
Example: id:20301,00 Success, , ,  
Example: id:20301,04 Fail, , ,  
Cancelling Communications with the Xerox Smart eSolutions Server  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the printer in the address field. Press Enter to  
open CentreWare Internet Services.  
2. Click the Properties tab.  
3. If prompted, enter the system administrator user name and password (default: admin, 1111).  
4. Click the Services folder, then the Xerox Services folder.  
5. Click Xerox Communication Server.  
6. In the Communication Setup area, uncheck the Server Communication check box.  
7. Click Apply.  
190 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Troubleshooting  
General Troubleshooting Procedure  
1. Make sure that the printer is ON and that the Main screen (typically the All Services screen) is  
displayed.  
2. Make sure that the printer is plugged into a live network drop, typically with a Category 5 twisted  
pair cable attached to the RJ-45 socket at the rear of the printer.  
Note: You can often determine if the drop is live by looking at the and activity (if available) light or  
lights at the rear of the printer. If these lights are lit and/or blinking, you have a live connection. If you  
cannot determine if the drop is live, plug the printer into another drop being used by another machine  
that is fully functioning on the network. You can use a hub to connect both machines to the live  
network drop so that you do not interrupt the operations of the working machine. If you do not have  
access to a second working drop, or a hub, connect a laptop to the RJ-45 socket at the rear of the  
printer using a crossover (not a patch) cable.  
3. Print a Configuration Report. For more information, see Configuration Report on page 22. Referring  
to the Configuration Report, determine if the appropriate ports and protocols are enabled for your  
Network environment.  
To support communicating with the printer's CentreWare Internet Services, the TCP/IP protocol  
should be enabled. The printer should also have a valid IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway  
displayed. For more information, see TCP/IP Protocol Configuration on page 43.  
As some Network Environment settings can only be configured through CentreWare Internet  
Services on the printer, if this tool is shown as disabled on the Configuration Report. For more  
4. At any networked computer, or at your laptop connected to the printer with a crossover cable, open  
your Web browser and enter the TCP/IP address of the printer (as shown on the Configuration  
Report) into the Address or Location field. Press Enter. If the HTTP port is enabled at the printer,  
you should see CentreWare Internet Services. Note that depending upon Authentication and  
Encryption settings, you might also see an Administrator Log In prompt, or a Digital Certificate  
prompt. With the display of these prompts or pages you have proven that the printer is  
communicating with HTTP over the TCP/IP network. A ping command (see TCP/IP  
Troubleshooting), issued from the computer’s command prompt, can further verify this working  
connection.  
5. To troubleshoot network communication problems interfering with printing or scanning to the  
printer’s hard drive (folders), refer to the specific topic, that applies to your network operating  
environment, within this Troubleshooting section.  
6. To resolve problems with system options, refer to the Configuration Report to determine if the  
options are installed, enabled, and properly configured on your machine.  
To enable purchased options, see Enabling Options with Software Keys on page 98.  
To properly configure enabled options, see Scanning and Faxing on page 97.  
192 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
TCP/IP Troubleshooting  
TCP/IP Troubleshooting  
Use the following check list to troubleshoot your network communication problem.  
Check Physical Media and Network Interface Cards  
1. Verify that the printer is on.  
2. Verify that the printer and Computer are using the correct cabling to communicate over the  
network. Use category 3 UTP patch (not crossover) cable for 10 Base T communications, category 5  
UTP patch (not crossover) cable for 10 Base T / 100 Base TX communications, and Token Ring  
cabling for Token Ring networks.  
3. Verify that the cable at both the printer and Computer is fully plugged into the Network Interface  
Card (NIC). Check the light, which is typically a green LED, to make sure that it is lit. Typically, but  
not always, a second light on the Network Interface Card will be intermittently flashing, indicating  
the presence of network traffic. If neither of these lights is lit, there is a problem with the NIC.  
At the Printer  
1. Print a Configuration Report. Under the Ethernet Rated Speed data label on the List, verify that  
your communications speed is correctly set for your network and that you have a MAC address  
listed. The driver for your NIC works at the Media Access Control (MAC) layer of the protocol stack.  
If no MAC address is shown, you have either a bad NIC or no NIC at all. Replace or install the  
Network Interface Card.  
2. Under the TCP/IP data label, determine the method being used to assign TCP/IP addressing to the  
printer. Specifically note the Mode being used. IP version 4 is the traditional mode using address  
formats of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Verify that the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway addresses are  
correct for your network and have not changed from their previous settings.  
Note: The use of DHCP (the DHCP Server) with a short lease time can cause the printer to be assigned  
a new IP Address when it is powered off for an extended period of time. This will interrupt  
communications with computers using the old IP address. If you do not want the IP address to be  
subject to constant changes, either increase the lease time at the DHCP Server, or use the Static IP  
Addressing method. For more information see TCP/IP Protocol Configuration on page 43.  
3. Under the LPD data label, if you are communicating with the printer through an LPR port, make  
sure that LPD is Enabled. Also verify that the displayed port number is 515. For more information  
4. Under the Port 9100 data label, to enable the printer to automatically determine the Page  
Description Language to use in processing jobs sent over the computer's LPR port, make sure that  
this Port is enabled. This is the meaning of the word raw when used to name the queue during LPR  
port creation. For more information, see Configure Port 9100 (Raw Printing) on page 51.  
5. Under the CentreWare Internet Services data label, verify that this feature is Enabled.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 193  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Troubleshooting  
At the Computer  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the TCP/IP address of the printer in the Address or Location  
field. Press Enter. If the printer's CentreWare Internet Services (Web pages) begin to display on the  
computer, you are communicating with the printer. If not, make sure that your Web browser is not  
set to use a proxy server and repeat the procedure. If unsuccessful, perform the next step.  
2. Verify that the computer has been assigned an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address by  
running a Command (DOS) prompt, typing ipconfig/all (Windows 2000/XP) and pressing Enter. If  
any of the addresses are incorrect or missing, right click the Network Neighborhood icon (My  
Network Places in Windows 2000), and make sure that the TCP/IP protocol is installed and  
properly configured for IP addressing. For XP, click Start/My Network Places, then right click in the  
open window, select Properties, right click Local Area Connection, and then select Properties.  
3. Run a Command (DOS) prompt on the computer and perform ping tests to verify successful packet  
transmission first to the computer's NIC, then to the Gateway (if being used), then to the printer's  
NIC. To run Ping Tests, at the Command (DOS) prompt, type: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx and press Enter.  
Note that there is a space between the word ping and the first xxx. Let xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx first  
represent the computer's IP address, then the IP address of the default gateway, and finally the IP  
address of the printer. If successful, you will receive a reply such as: Reply from xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:  
bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128. If you receive Time Out or 0 bytes received notifications, the  
printer being pinged is incorrectly configured or malfunctioning.  
4. If Web browser and Ping Tests are successful but you are still unable to print to the printer, verify  
that the driver is using the correct LPR Port to print through. On Windows desktops, select Start,  
Settings, Printers (Start/Printers and Faxes in XP), right click the printer's icon, and select  
Properties. Select the Ports Tab (Windows 2000) and verify that the LPR Port being printed  
through matches the IP Address of the printer. If the IP address does not match, you are printing  
to the wrong device on the network. Either select the correct port from the displayed list, or use the  
Add Port button to create a new port with an IP Address matching that of your printer.  
5. If the correct Port is being used by the driver but you are still unable to print, perform the following  
procedure. In Windows 2000 or XP, verify that Print Services for UNIX are installed in the computer.  
6. Note that access to this printer's Services can be restricted by Host IP addresses. As this feature  
could cause communications to appear to fail in certain instances, see IP Filtering (IP Address  
7. To assure successful printing, make sure that the printer is configured to support the Page  
Description Language (PDL) being used by your driver. To check the PDL being used by the driver,  
print a test job to file. Open and view the job in a program such as Notepad. The PDL being used by  
the driver will be displayed in the first few lines of Printer Language. Next, check the Page  
Description Languages being supported by the printer's ports. For more information, see Setting  
PDL Emulations on page 30. The PDL being used by the driver, and the PDL supported by the Port  
you are printing to, must match for successful printing to occur.  
194 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
NetBIOS over IP Troubleshooting  
NetBIOS over IP Troubleshooting  
Use the following check list to troubleshoot your network communication problem.  
Check Physical Media and Network Interface Cards  
1. Verify that the printer is powered On.  
2. Verify that the printer and Computer are using the correct cabling to communicate over the  
network. Use category 3 UTP patch (not crossover) cable for 10 Base T communications, category 5  
UTP patch (not crossover) cable for 10 Base T / 100 Base TX communications, and Token Ring  
cabling for Token Ring networks.  
3. Verify that the cable at both the printer and Computer is fully plugged into the Network Interface  
Card (NIC). Check the light, which is typically a green LED, to make sure that it is lit. Typically, but  
not always, a second light on the Network Interface Card will be intermittently flashing, indicating  
the presence of network traffic. If neither of these lights is lit, there is a problem with the NIC.  
At the Printer  
1. Print a Configuration Report. On the Configuration Report, verify that SMB is enabled. For more  
2. On the Configuration Report, note that the default name of the printer's workgroup is Workgroup  
and that the printer has a unique SMB Host Name. To modify the printer's Workgroup or SMB Host  
Name, if required, use your computer's Web browser to access the CentreWare Internet Services.  
3. On the Configuration Report, under the TCP/IP data label, note what method the printer is using to  
acquire its TCP/IP addresses. If the method shown is STATIC, make sure that the printer has a valid  
IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address for the network.  
4. On the Configuration Report, verify that DNS is enabled. The use of Naming Servers is REQUIRED  
to resolve NetBIOS device names to IP addresses for packet routing over the TCP/IP network. If in  
doubt as to whether DNS and WINS are enabled, see Microsoft (NetBIOS over IP) Networks on  
Warning: If the printer is not informed of the addresses of the DNS/WINS Servers, you may not be  
able to see or use the printer's NetBIOS name on the network. Make sure that the printer is informed of  
the addresses of the DNS/WINS Servers, using the instructions supplied in the above mentioned  
procedures.  
5. Under the CentreWare Internet Services data label, verify that this feature is Enabled. You must use  
this tool at your computer if you need to change the printer's Workgroup name, the SMB Host  
Name, the TCP/IP (internet) Host Name, or DNS settings. Note that when using DNS to resolve  
host names to IP addresses, the NetBIOS name (SMB Host) and the TCP/IP Host Name must be  
the same.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 195  
System Administrator Guide  
     
Troubleshooting  
At the DNS or WINS Server  
1. Refer to the Server Operating System documentation for the appropriate procedure to use to  
enable Host name to IP address resolution on the Server.  
2. Make sure that the printer's TCP/IP (internet) Host Name and NetBIOS (SMB Host) Name (which  
should be identical for DNS) is being mapped to an IP Address on the Server.  
3. Refer to the printer's Configuration Report and verify that the printer's TCP/IP Host and NetBIOS  
(SMB Host) Names continue to match the entries in the Server's database. Also verify that the IP  
Address shown on the Report matches the IP address in the Server's database. If the information is  
incorrect on the Server, NetBIOS communications from the computers to the printer will be  
disrupted.  
At the Computer  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the TCP/IP address of the printer in the Address or Location  
field. Press Enter. If the printer's CentreWare Internet Services (Web pages) begin to display on the  
computer, you are communicating with the printer. If not, make sure that your Web browser is not  
set to use a proxy server and repeat the procedure. If unsuccessful, perform the next step.  
2. On Windows 2000 computers, verify that the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) is installed and that it is  
configured for DNS resolution of the NetBIOS Host Name. Also verify that the Client for Microsoft  
Networks is installed. Finally, through Add/Remove Programs and Add/Remove Windows  
Components, select Other Network File and Print Services, click Details, check the box for Print  
Services for UNIX, and click OK and Next.  
3. Run a Command (DOS) prompt on the computer and perform ping tests to verify successful packet  
transmission first to the computer's NIC, then to the Gateway (if being used), then to the printer's  
NIC. To run Ping Tests, at the Command (DOS) prompt, type: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx and press Enter.  
Note that there is a space between the word ping and the first xxx. Let xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx first  
represent the computer's IP address, then the IP address of the default gateway, and finally the IP  
address of the printer (as shown on the Configuration Report).  
4. If communicating with the printer in a Peer to Peer environment, at the Computer's Desktop  
double click the Network Neighborhood icon and see if the Printer's SMB Host Name appears in  
the Workgroup indicated on the Configuration Report. If it does not, SMB may not be enabled at  
the printer, or there is no Master Browser in the Workgroup. Check the Configuration Report to  
verify that SMB is enabled and, if necessary, enable Auto Master Mode. For more information, see  
5. From your Computer's Desktop, click Start/Settings/Printers (Start/Printers and Faxes in XP), right  
click the Printer's icon and select Properties. From the Ports Tab (Windows 2000) determine the  
Port that the driver is using to print through. For peer to peer communications, the port name  
should match the SMB Host name of the printer as shown on the Configuration Report. If it  
doesn't you are printing to the wrong port and either need to select the correct port or use the Add  
Port button to create a new port for the driver to print through. For more information, see TCP/IP  
Peer to Peer (LPR or Standard TCP/IP) Printing on page 13. If the name matches, use the General  
Tab of the driver to print a test page to determine the status of communications between the  
Computer and the printer.  
6. If communicating with the printer in a Client/Server environment, at the Computer's Desktop  
double click the Network Neighborhood icon and see if the Printer's Server is displayed. If you  
double click the Server's name, a list of Shared printers should be displayed, with the Printer being  
196 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
   
NetBIOS over IP Troubleshooting  
one of the printers shown. Note that since the Printer is identified as a Share name on the Server, it  
may not have the same name as the SMB Host name on the Configuration Report. If you do not  
recognize your Server or Printer's name in the list, perform the following step.  
7. From your Computer's Desktop, click Start/Settings/Printers (Start/Printers and Faxes in XP),  
right click the Printer's icon and select Properties. From the Ports Tab (Windows 2000) determine  
the Port that the driver is using to print through. For Client/Server communications, the port name  
should be in the form of a UNC (universal naming convention) such as  
\\Computer_name\Share_name. If it isn't you are printing to the wrong port and either need to  
select the correct port or use the Add Port button to create a new port for the driver to print  
through. If the name looks correct, use the General tab of the driver to print a test page to  
determine the status of communications between the computer and the printer.  
8. Note that if you have the UNC of the Printer, you can enter this into the text box of the Run  
command on your computer. When you press Enter, the computer will attempt to reconnect to the  
network Server and Printer Share that was specified by the UNC. Depending upon how the Server  
was configured you can then either manually or automatically reinstall the driver.  
9. To assure successful printing, make sure that the printer is configured to support the Page  
Description Language (PDL) being used by your driver. To check the PDL being used by the driver,  
print a test job to file. Open and view the job in a program such as Notepad. The PDL being used by  
the driver will be displayed in the first few lines of Printer Language. Next, check the Page  
Description Languages being supported by the printer's ports.The PDL being used by the driver,  
and the PDL supported by the Port you are printing to, must match for successful printing to occur.  
For more information, see Setting PDL Emulations on page 30.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 197  
System Administrator Guide  
Troubleshooting  
IPP Troubleshooting  
Use the following check list to troubleshoot your network communication problem.  
Check Physical Media and Network Interface Cards  
1. Verify that the printer is powered On.  
2. Verify that the printer and Computer are using the correct cabling to communicate over the  
network. Use category 3 UTP patch (not crossover) cable for 10 Base T communications, category 5  
UTP patch (not crossover) cable for 10 Base T / 100 Base TX communications, and Token Ring  
cabling for Token Ring networks.  
3. Verify that the cable at both the printer and Computer is fully plugged into the Network Interface  
Card (NIC). Check the light, which is typically a green LED, to make sure that it is lit. Typically, but  
not always, a second light on the Network Interface Card will be intermittently flashing, indicating  
the presence of network traffic. If neither of these lights is lit, there is a problem with the NIC.  
At the Printer  
1. Print a Configuration Report. Under the Ethernet Rated Speed data label on the Report, verify that  
your communications speed is correctly set for your network and that you have a MAC address  
listed. The driver for your NIC works at the Media Access Control (MAC) layer of the protocol stack.  
If no MAC address is shown, you have either a bad NIC or no NIC at all. Replace or install the  
Network Interface Card.  
2. Under the CentreWare Internet Services data label, verify that this feature is Enabled.  
3. Under the TCP/IP data label, determine the method being used to assign TCP/IP addressing to the  
printer. Verify that the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway addresses are correct for your  
network and have not changed from their previous settings.  
Note: The use of DHCP (the DHCP Server) with a short lease time can cause the printer to be assigned  
a new IP Address when it is powered off for an extended period of time. This will interrupt  
communications with computers using the old IP address. If you do not want the IP address to be  
subject to constant changes, either increase the lease time at the DHCP Server, or use the Static IP  
Addressing method . For more information, see TCP/IP Protocol Configuration on page 43.  
4. Under the IPP data label, verify that the IPP Port is Enabled. For more information, see IPP  
5. Under the IPP data label, verify that IPP is using DNS to resolve Host Names to IP Addresses in  
support of IPP printing. If it is not, type the printer’s IP address into your Web browser’s address  
field and press enter. Click the Properties tab. Click the Connectivity folder, then the Protocols  
folder and click IPP. Verify that the DNS Enablement Check Box is checked. If it is not checked,  
check it with your mouse and click Apply, then Reboot Machine.  
6. Under the IPP data label, verify that the Port number associated with IPP is 631. This is the port  
number assigned to IPP by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.  
198 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
     
IPP Troubleshooting  
At the Computer  
Note: As IPP (the Internet Printing Protocol) is supported by all Windows computers, the following  
procedure is written specifically for Windows. The IPP printing service is available for other computer  
operating systems through downloads from the Microsoft Web site. In general, troubleshooting  
procedures for other operating systems will be similar to this one.  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the TCP/IP address of the printer in the Address or Location  
field. Press Enter. If the printer's CentreWare Internet Services (Web pages) begin to display on the  
computer, you are communicating with the printer. If not, make sure that your Web browser is not  
set to use a proxy server and repeat the procedure. If unsuccessful, perform the next step.  
2. Verify that the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) is installed in the Windows 2000 or XP computer. On the  
Windows 2000 Desktop, right click My Network Places and select Properties. Right click Local  
Area Connection and select Properties. On the Windows XP desktop, click Start, Control Panel,  
and double click Network Connections. Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select  
Properties. Verify that the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) has been loaded. If it has, click (highlight) this  
item with your mouse and click the Properties button to verify that this computer is using either a  
dynamic or static method to obtain a valid TCP/IP address, and that the computer's host name is  
being resolved using DNS. If the TCP/IP protocol is not loaded, click the Install… button, then  
select Protocol as the type of network component that you wish to install. Click the Add… button  
and select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). With your operating system installer disk readily available,  
click the Have Disk… button and follow any remaining instructions. Once the protocol has been  
installed, you can click (highlight) the item with your mouse and click the Properties button to  
verify or set up the method being used for TCP/IP addressing.  
3. Perform ping tests to verify successful packet transmission first to the computer's NIC, then to the  
Gateway (if being used), then to the printer's NIC. To run Ping Tests, click Start, Run, then type:  
ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx and press Enter. Note that there is a space between the word ping and the  
first xxx. Let xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx first represent the computer's IP address, then the IP address of the  
default gateway, and finally the IP address of the printer. If successful, you will receive a reply such  
as: Reply from xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128. If you receive Time Out or 0 bytes  
received notifications, the printer being pinged is incorrectly configured or malfunctioning.  
4. If Web browser and Ping Tests are successful but you are still unable to print to the printer, verify  
that the driver is using an IPP Port to print through. From the Windows desktop, select Start,  
Settings, Printers (Start/Printers and Faxes in XP), right click the printer's icon, and select  
Properties. Select the Ports Tab and verify that the IPP Port being printed through matches the IP  
Address, or fully qualified Domain Name, of the Printer. If the IP address (or fully qualified Domain  
Name) does not match, you are printing to the wrong device on the network. Either select the  
correct port from the displayed list, or use the Add Port button to create a new IPP port with an IP  
Address (or fully qualified Domain Name) matching that of your printer.  
Note: A fully qualified Domain Name consists of the printer's internet Host Name, followed by its  
internet domain name, separated by periods.  
5. Note that access to this printer's Services can be restricted by Host IP addresses. This feature could  
cause communications to appear to fail in certain instances. For more information, see IP Filtering  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 199  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Troubleshooting  
6. To assure successful printing, make sure that the printer is configured to support the Page  
Description Language (PDL) being used by your driver. To check the PDL being used by the driver,  
print a test job to file. Open and view the job in a program such as Notepad. The PDL being used by  
the driver will be displayed in the first few lines of Printer Language. Next, check the Page  
Description Languages being supported by the printer's ports. The PDL being used by the driver,  
and the PDL supported by the Port you are printing to, must match for successful printing to occur.  
For more information, see Setting PDL Emulations on page 30.  
200 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
EtherTalk Troubleshooting  
EtherTalk Troubleshooting  
Use the following check list to troubleshoot your network communication problem.  
Check Physical Media and Network Interface Cards  
1. Verify that the printer is powered ON.  
2. Verify that the printer and Computer are using the correct cabling to communicate over the  
network. Use category 3 UTP patch (not crossover) cable for 10 Base T communications, category 5  
UTP patch (not crossover) cable for 10 Base T / 100 Base TX communications, and Token Ring  
cabling for Token Ring networks.  
3. Verify that the cable at both the printer and Computer is fully plugged into the Network Interface  
Card (NIC). Check the light, which is typically a green LED, to make sure that it is lit. Typically, but  
not always, a second light on the Network Interface Card will be intermittently flashing, indicating  
the presence of network traffic. If neither of these lights is lit, there is a problem with the NIC.  
At the Printer  
1. Print a Configuration Report. Under the Ethernet Rated Speed data label on the Report, verify that  
your communications speed is correctly set for your network and that you have a MAC address  
listed. The driver for your NIC works at the Media Access Control (MAC) layer of the protocol stack.  
If no MAC address is shown, you have either a bad NIC or no NIC at all. Replace or install the  
Network Interface Card.  
2. Under the CentreWare Internet Services data label, verify that this feature is Enabled.  
3. Under the EtherTalk data label, verify that the Port is enabled, and that printer has been assigned  
an EtherTalk Printer Name and an EtherTalk zone. If one or more of these parameters needs to be  
4. Under the EtherTalk data label and at the bottom of the Configuration Report, verify that  
PostScript is installed in the printer. If a PostScript license is installed in the printer, the PostScript  
logo will be clearly displayed at the bottom of the Report.  
Note: If a PostScript license is not installed in the printer, EtherTalk will not be displayed on the  
Configuration Report, and will be unavailable for configuration using CentreWare Internet Services.  
Consult your Xerox Representative for assistance.  
At a Macintosh Computer  
Verify that the Printer is visible in the Chooser. If it is not, install the Driver and PPD file. For more  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 201  
System Administrator Guide  
       
Troubleshooting  
Scanning to Hard Drive Troubleshooting  
Use the following check list to troubleshoot your network communication problem.  
Note: It is assumed that you purchased the Scanning option to enable Scanning to the Hard Drive with  
your printer. If you did not, contact your Xerox Representative to purchase this option.  
Check Physical Media and Network Interface Cards  
1. Verify that the printer is On.  
2. Verify that the printer and Computer are using the correct cabling to communicate over the  
network. Use category 3 UTP patch (not crossover) cable for 10 Base T communications, category 5  
UTP patch (not crossover) cable for 10 Base T / 100 Base TX communications, and Token Ring  
cabling for Token Ring networks.  
3. Verify that the cable at both the printer and Computer is fully plugged into the Network Interface  
Card (NIC). Check the light, which is typically a green LED, to make sure that it is lit. Typically, but  
not always, a second light on the Network Interface Card will be intermittently flashing, indicating  
the presence of network traffic. If neither of these lights is lit, there is a problem with the NIC.  
At the Computer  
1. Print a Configuration Report. Under the Ethernet Rated Speed data label on the Report, verify that  
your communications speed is correctly set for your network and that you have a MAC address  
listed. The driver for your NIC works at the Media Access Control (MAC) layer of the protocol stack.  
If no MAC address is shown, you have either a bad NIC or no NIC at all. Replace or install the  
Network Interface Card.  
2. Under the CentreWare Internet Services data label, verify that this feature is enabled.  
3. Under the TCP/IP data label, determine the method being used to assign TCP/IP addressing to the  
printer. Verify that the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway addresses are correct for your  
network and have not changed from their previous settings.  
Note: The use of DHCP (the DHCP Server) with a short lease time can cause the printer to be assigned  
a new IP Address when it is powered off for an extended period of time. This will interrupt  
communications with computers using the old IP address. If you do not want the IP address to be  
subject to constant changes, either increase the lease time at the DHCP Server, or use the Static IP  
Addressing method. For more information, see TCP/IP Protocol Configuration on page 43.  
At the Printer  
1. Verify that you have correctly set up your folder. For more information, see Setting Up Folders at  
2. Scan a test document to your Folder. For more information, see Scanning to the Printer’s Hard  
202 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
       
Scanning to Hard Drive Troubleshooting  
At the Computer  
1. Open your Web browser and enter the TCP/IP address of the printer in the Address or Location  
field. Press Enter. If CentreWare Internet Services displays on the computer, you are  
communicating with the printer. If not, make sure that your Web browser is not set to use a proxy  
server and repeat the procedure. If unsuccessful, perform the next step.  
2. Verify that the computer has been assigned an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address by  
running a Command (DOS) prompt, typing ipconfig/all (Windows 2000/XP) and pressing Enter If  
any of the addresses are incorrect or missing, right click the Network Neighborhood icon (My  
Network Places in Windows 2000) and make sure that the TCP/IP protocol is installed and  
properly configured for IP addressing.  
3. Run a Command (DOS) prompt on the computer and perform ping tests to verify successful packet  
transmission first to the computer's NIC, then to the Gateway (if being used), then to the printer's  
NIC. To run Ping Tests, at the Command (DOS) prompt, type: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx and press Enter.  
Note that there is a space between the word ping and the first xxx. Let xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx first  
represent the computer's IP address, then the IP address of the default gateway, and finally the IP  
address of the printer. If successful, you will receive a reply such as: Reply from xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:  
bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128. If you receive Time Out or 0 bytes received notifications, the  
printer being pinged is incorrectly configured or malfunctioning.  
4. When CentreWare Internet Services are successfully displayed on your monitor, retrieve your  
scanned test document. For more information, see Retrieving Images from Folders on page 130.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 203  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Troubleshooting  
Image Quality Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Repeating white or colored marks / The drum cartridge has  
Replace the drum cartridge that  
matches the color of the defect.  
spots / lines / bands every 94 mm  
(approx 3.75 in) or 37 mm (approx  
1.5 in)  
deteriorated or is damaged.  
Repeating Image, Mark or Spot  
every 84mm (approx. 3.25 in).  
Media was run in incorrect mode  
causing toner offsetting.  
Check that the media type  
selections match the media type  
being used.  
Defect or contamination on Fuser  
Roll.  
Run 10 blank sheets.  
Replace the Fuser Assy.  
White streak or deletion running  
full length of sheet from Lead  
edge to trail edge.  
Dirt / contamination on printhead. Clean all printheads using  
cleaning tool.  
Black or Color streaks running full  
length of sheet from Lead edge to deteriorated or is damaged.  
trail edge.  
The drum cartridge has  
Replace the drum cartridge that  
matches the color of the streak.  
Light / uneven density or faint  
image.  
Media was run in incorrect mode  
causing poor image transfer.  
Check that the media type  
selections matches the media type  
being run.  
Damp paper causing poor image  
transfer.  
Load new paper.  
Non-recommended media is being Use Xerox recommended media.  
used.  
Black lines or spots on copies when Document glass or CVT glass are  
Clean document glass & CVT  
glass.  
using document feeder.  
dirty  
Completely blank copies when  
document feeder or document  
glass is used.  
Two or more sheets fed together.  
Systems error.  
Check for multifed sheets in  
output.  
Fan the paper or load fresh paper.  
Power machine Off / On.  
Completely blank output when  
printing.  
Two or more sheets fed together.  
Poor connection with printer.  
Check for multifed sheets in  
output.  
Fan the paper or load new paper.  
Check / reseat data cables.  
Power machine Off / On.  
204 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Image Quality Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
High background or dirt on copy.  
The document glass or document  
cover is dirty.  
Clean the document glass and  
document cover.  
Document may be transparent (a  
transparency).  
Place a sheet of paper over  
transparent documents.  
Document is on colored paper or  
rough paper.  
Select Auto Background  
Suppression.  
Document is on glossy paper.  
For glossy documents place a  
transparency between the  
document and glass. Power  
machine Off / On.  
The copy density is too dark or too Copy density is set to Lighten or  
Check Lighten / Darken setting on  
Image Quality Image Options  
screen. Adjust as needed.  
light.  
Darken on Image Quality Image  
options screen.  
The Image is slightly misaligned  
on Copies or Prints.  
Paper is not properly loaded or  
aligned in paper tray.  
Check that paper is correctly  
loaded in paper tray.  
Paper guides in Tray 5 not aligned Ensure that guides are located  
with paper stack.  
against stack in Tray 5.  
Guides in Document feeder are  
not in correct position.  
Ensure that guides in document  
feeder are correctly located.  
Copy is misaligned or skewed.  
Document is not correctly located  
on document glass.  
Ensure that document is aligned  
with registration edges on the  
document glass.  
Color reproduction is not as  
expected.  
Incorrect color matching settings  
in print driver.  
Check / correct color matching  
driver settings.  
Color parameters have changed.  
Run Color calibration procedure -  
Missing image or image deletions. Damp paper causing poor image  
transfer.  
Load new paper.  
Check condition of paper in paper  
tray, replace a/r.  
Paper in tray may be folded or  
wrinkled.  
Place small stack of paper on top  
Document on glass includes paste of document to hold it flat to  
up sections.  
document glass.  
Wrinkled, damaged or Creased  
Sheets.  
Paper is damp / old.  
Load new paper.  
Poor quality paper being used.  
Use Xerox recommended media.  
Check / reload paper in trays.  
Paper not correctly loaded in  
paper trays.  
Toner rubs off sheet or smudges.  
Media was run in incorrect mode  
causing poor fusing of image.  
Check that the media type  
selections matches the media type  
being run. Load new paper.  
Damp paper being used.  
Use Xerox recommended media.  
Non recommended media being  
used.  
Check for blank sheets in output.  
Replace the Fuser Assy.  
Two or more sheets fed together.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 205  
System Administrator Guide  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Excessive paper curl.  
Paper is damp / old.  
Load new paper.  
Turn paper stack over.  
Poor quality paper being used.  
Custom cut paper has wrong grain Use Xerox approved media, see  
direction.  
RML.  
Load custom cut paper in different  
orientation or cut short grain.  
Color Calibration  
The color calibration procedure is used to ensure consistent color reproduction over time for copies and  
prints. Performing the calibration procedure adjusts the output densities to be as close to the printer’s  
specified values as possible. If performed on media which has lower densities the outcome will be  
increased densities and vice versa. It should be performed if optimal color reproduction and  
consistency over time is desired.  
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
2. Enter the System Administrator’s Login ID and Passcode if prompted (default admin, 1111), and  
press Enter.  
3. Press the Machine Status button.  
4. Touch the Tools tab.  
5. Select the Setup & Calibration button.  
6. Select the Calibration button from the Group section. The Calibration screen will be displayed.  
7. Select the required calibration button:  
Copy Job 1 – Text & Text/Photo Modes  
Copy Job 2 – Photo Mode  
Print Job 1 – Lower quality modes  
Print Job 2 – Higher quality modes  
8. Select the Paper Supply button. The Paper Supply screen will be displayed.  
9. Select the required paper tray to print the Calibration Test Page from the list displayed, and then  
select the Save button.  
10. Select the Target button.  
11. Select the required calibration type:  
Copy & Print Jobs  
Copy Jobs Only  
Print Jobs Only  
None  
Note: To fully calibrate both copies and prints it is necessary to run all four job types and apply them to  
the corresponding type. If such precision is not needed one should select the most important output  
type and then apply the results to both copy and print jobs. If one is experiencing color reproduction  
issues in one Job type but not the others then it is only necessary to run calibration for the problematic  
job type.  
206 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  
 
Image Quality Troubleshooting  
12. Select the Save button.  
13. Select the Start button on the Touch Screen. A Calibration Test Page will print with instructions on  
how to perform the calibration.  
14. Follow the instructions to perform the calibration, and then select the Start button on the touch  
screen. A message stating the calibration was successful or unsuccessful will be displayed.  
Note: The calibration sheet with the two magenta (pink) squares on the top and bottom of the page,  
must be placed face -down (printed side) with the magenta squares along the left side of the  
document glass. If the calibration sheet is not positioned correctly on the glass, a message will be  
displayed. Make sure the calibration sheet is positioned correctly, and then select the Start button on  
the Touch Screen.  
Select the Confirm button.  
15. Repeat steps 6 - 14 for any other calibration type that is required.  
16. When finished calibrating, select the Close button.  
17. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.  
18. Select the Logout button on the Touch Screen.  
WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435 207  
System Administrator Guide  
Troubleshooting  
208 WorkCentre 7425/7428/7435  
System Administrator Guide  

Lanier Jp1030 User Manual
Mitsubishi Electronics Mr Slim Mcf D24vd User Manual
Royal Sovereign Arp 5010x User Manual
Samsung Avmch140ea User Manual
Samsung Aw07ph Series User Manual
Samsung Us24a1 2 Rcd User Manual
Sanyo Kms0972 User Manual
Sharp Air Cleaner Fp A80uw User Manual
Toshiba Air Conditioner Mmy Map0804ht8zg E User Manual
York D3hh 180 User Manual